<?xml version="1.0"?>
<?xml-stylesheet type="text/css" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/skins/common/feed.css?303"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=John.devonshire</id>
		<title>Dot2DotCommunications - User contributions [en]</title>
		<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=John.devonshire"/>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Special:Contributions/John.devonshire"/>
		<updated>2026-05-21T00:40:46Z</updated>
		<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
		<generator>MediaWiki 1.21.1</generator>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Reports</id>
		<title>Reports</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Reports"/>
				<updated>2023-12-04T12:59:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;For information on how to customize an existing report, please see [[Customizing a Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available Locations Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Available Locations Report provides information on faces that will be available for a specified period of time. This is a valuable report when looking to supplement the Location List with specific locations or to provide your client with a list of available locations for their potential campaign. This report can be filtered and fine-tuned to provide you with the exact list of available locations that you require, and that your client has asked for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Available Locations Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports  button. Then go to Sales - Available Locations and choose the layout you wish to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Available_Locations_Layout.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have double-clicked on the Layout you want, the following Print Screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Available_Locations_Print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Available Faces Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is not necessary to select any criteria, except for a period of availability, however if you choose to select criteria, here is a discription of what can be filtered on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Period - This prompt allows you to specify the time frame for reporting on locations that are available in your inventory.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
+/- days - This option allows you to choose an [[Charting How To#Setting Options for Charting|availability date margin]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Leave gaps in multiples of - In a number of cases, you may be charting several months in advance of the showing. When you do this, you can create time gaps where Faces should not be used. See [[Charting How To#Setting Options for Charting|Minimizing Gaps]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media type - This option allows you to identify which media type you wish to run the report for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Market - This option allows you to identify which Market you wish to run the report for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Unit type - This option allows you to identify which unit type you wish to run the report for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Area - This option allows you to identify which area you wish to run the report for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
More criteria... - If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, select this check box. This action will open up the filter options so you can further streamline your report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Take Over Tab ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Available_Locations_Take_Over.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are tight for space during a particular time frame or want to find faces that may be acceptable that aren't currently considered available, you can use the [[Charting How To#Take Over Feature|Take Over features]] to generate a larger pool of faces to select from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Background Database Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The following Background Databases Reports can also be printed when desired. Each of these reports has no options as to their content. The report prints a copy of all the information contained in each database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;wikitable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Areas || Cities || Counties&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Countries || Markets || Media Types&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Mobile Routes || Neighbours || Permits&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| Places || Plants || Posting Routes&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| States || Unit Types ||&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run any of these Background Databases Reports, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports button. Then go to Inventory - Other, select the background database category and double-click on the List Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Background_Report.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Bill Posting Design Summary Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Bill Posting Design Summary Report provides the Bill Poster with a list of all the Designs required to complete the Posting Tasks during a specified time frame. The quantity of copies needed of each creative is also listed next to the Design Name. In order to run this report, you must specify the desired time frame. All creative that is needed to complete Posting Tasks that are due in this time frame will be listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Bill Posting Design Summary Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Posting Tasks and double-click on the Bill Posting Design Summary Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Bill_Posting_Design_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter allows the user to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to only those Designs for Posting Tasks you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays Designs for Posting Tasks which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of Designs reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to see all Designs, or only those involving a Posting, Re-post or those involving a Take Down/Cover. You can also specify the Date(s) you want to print your list for. The report will only list the Designs for those Posting Tasks where the Due Date is within the date range specified. If no date range is entered under Due Date, every Design in Ad Manager will be printed (subject to your other criteria).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also choose to filter which Designs to include by selecting the desired items. For example, you may only wish to produce a list of Designs for Posting Tasks assigned to a certain Bill Poster, or select Posting Tasks where the Design is to originate from a particular source plant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have set all your desired criteria, click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Billing Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Budget and Audit Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Campaign Summary Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Campaign Summary Report provides summary of delivery information for all Subcontracts of a Contract and all Markets for that Contract upon the Contract's completion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Campaign Summary Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports  button. Then go to Performance - Campaign Summary and choose the layout you wish to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Campaign Summary (Cdn) - This is the Canadian version of the Campaign Summary Report. It is a COMB (Canadian Outdoor Measurement Bureau) approved report that is to be used by Canadian plant operators for reporting purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Campaign_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have double-clicked on the Layout you want, the following Print Screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Campaign_Summary_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Quick Find button to choose the contract you wish to report on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Category Sales Sumarry Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Category Sales Summary Report provides a breakdown of sales revenue for each of your Categories (e.g. Automotive, Restaurant, etc.). The report displays the Primary Categories with the sold costs in dollar amounts for Gross Value, Net Value and Rate Card Value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Category Sales Summary Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Sales - Subcontracts and double-click on the Category Sales Summary Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Category_Sales_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on certain criteria, select the check box for Selection Criteria. The filter will allow you to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to only those items you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays items which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of items reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your filter parameters, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Category/Advertiser Sales Summary Report ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Category/Advertiser Sales Summary Report provides a breakdown of what sales have been like for each of your Advertisers, grouped by your Categories. The report displays each Advertiser with the sold costs in dollar amounts for Gross Value, Net Value and Rate Card Value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Completion Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Contracted Open Space Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several formats of Contracted Open Space Reports that can be run in Ad Manager which are found under two categories in the Reports Window. These reports provide information on what space has been SOLD to advertisers. These reports only deal with availability based on information input into the Subcontracts Counts Tab. Faces are assigned to each area based on the market distribution being used for each Subcontract. This distribution is applied to the number of faces listed on each Subcontract Counts Tab to determine expected occupancy and availability. The only other information taken into account are any custom distributions entered on the Distribution Tab of the Subcontracts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For availability based on scheduling (charting) information, see the [[Reports#Scheduled Open Space|Scheduled Open Space Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Contracted Open Space Reports provide a table on how many faces have been Sold and how many are Available in each of your markets over future time frames.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Contracted Open Space Reports, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Sales and choose either Contracted Open Space (12 Periods) or Contracted Open Space (24 Periods).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screen shows the various Layouts in the Contracted Open Space (12 Periods) category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Contracted_Open_Space_12.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screen shows the various layouts in the Contracted Open Space (24 Periods) category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Contracted_Open_Space_24.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have double-clicked on the Layout you want, the following Print Screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Contracted_Open_Space_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Contracted Open Space Report, you must select a time interval and a start date. All other items are optional, however...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time Interval - Select the time period for reporting, by clicking on the radial dial next to the desired time interval. The selections are Every 5 days, One, Five, Ten days..., Weekly, Twice a month, and Monthly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start Date - The Start Date field allows you to identify the beginning of the time frame for which you wish to print the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filter Subcontracts - If you wish to produce a report based on specific Subcontract information, select this check box and choose your filter options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignore Dead Proposals, Proposals, Limited Holds (Expired) - This option allows you to choose whether you wish proposals and expired holds to be included in the numbers produced on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media - This option allows you to identify the media type on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Area - This option allows you to identify the area on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Market - Identify the market on which you wish to run the report in the Market field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
City - This option allows you to identify the city on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filter Faces - If you wish to produce a report based on specific face information, select this check box and choose your filter options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Include Non-saleable, Retired, Inactive, Not Installed Faces - If you wish to see include non-active faces to your report, click the check box next to this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Areas grouped by market Layout ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This layout provides information on the number of faces available in each area of your plant, allowing you to determine your expected occupancy in each area based on default market distributions, customized market distributions and Subcontract information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dead Copy Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Dead Copy Report is used to identify any Faces where the currently posted copy is no longer supposed to be up because the Contract/Subcontract has expired. This report allows you to identify Faces which are immediately available for posting to another Contract/Subcontract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Dead Copy Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Dead Copy and double-click on the Dead Copy Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Dead_Copy.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following Print Screen will then open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Dead_Copy_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;As of &amp;quot; Date allows you to identify the date for which you wish to run a Dead Copy Report for (default is today's date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, select the check box for Selection Criteria. The filter will allow you to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to only those items you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays items which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of items reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your filter parameters, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Design Activities Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Design Activities Report provides a listing of any activity related to Designs arriving or leaving the plants.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Design Activities Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Designs - Design Activities and double-click on the List Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Design_Activities.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to filter the report further, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter will allow you to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to include only those items you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays items which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of items reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your filter parameters, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Export a Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
A report format can be exported as a Report Layout format (*.rpl) in order to send a custom report to another office for use in Ad Manager or to send to Dot2Dot Communications to investigate any anomalies with the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To export a report layout, click on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. This will open the Reports Window. Once the Reports Window is open, go to the category the report belongs to and highlight the Layout you wish to export in the Layout Window. Next, select File - Export from the Reports menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Export_Report.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Save As dialog box will open so that you can select where you wish to save the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Export_Report_save.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected the folder to which you will export your report, give it a name in the File Name: field and make sure that the Save as Type: is Report Layout Files (*rpl), click the Save button. A copy of the report has been exported and you are free to close the Report Window. You can now e-mail the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on importing reports, [[Reports#Import a Report|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Face Scheduling History ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Face Scheduling History Report allows you to see a history of Advertisers and Designs posted and scheduled on each Face during a specified time period. The report displays these postings with their scheduled posting dates as well as their actual posted and covered dates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Face Scheduling History Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Postings and double-click on the Face Scheduling History Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Face_Scheduling_History.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to filter your report further, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter will allow you to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to include only those items you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays items which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of items reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your filter parameters, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Grouped Availability Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Grouped Availability Report provides you with the ability to determine how many Faces are available for a specified time interval for a specified number of consecutive weeks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Grouped Availability Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Sales - Grouped Availability (8 Periods) and double-click on the Grouped Availability (Standard) Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Grouped_Availability.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following Print Screen will then open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Grouped_Availability_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Start Date &amp;quot; allows you to identify the start date for which you wish to run a Grouped Availability Report from (default is today's date).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Availability (in days)&amp;quot; option allows you to specify the interval you wish to use for finding the information on how many Faces are available and how many are booked. The number entered here acts as a multiple, and data are provided accordingly. For example, if you enter an Availability of 7, information on how many Faces are available is provided for 7, 14, 21, 28, etc. consecutive days.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This report will take some time to generate as it has to check the availability of each Face for each time frame for each week selected. In order to speed up the processing time, the software gives you the option to choose the number of consecutive weeks worth of data you wish to see by entering it in the &amp;quot;Number of Weekly Increments&amp;quot; field. The fewer the number of consecutive weeks reported on, the faster the report will generate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Media&amp;quot; field allows you to identify which media type you wish to run the report for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;Market&amp;quot; field allows you to identify which Market you wish to run the report for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Import a Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
To import a report, click on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. This will open the Reports Window. The report must have a Report Layout File (*.rpl) in order to import into Ad Manager. Once the Reports Window is open, go to the category the report belongs to so that all its current layouts are visible in the Layout Window. Next, select File - Import from the Reports menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Import.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screen will then appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Import_Report.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Find and highlight the Report Layout File (*.rpl) you wish to import and click the Open button. At this point you will be prompted to Name the New Report Layout. This is the name you will see in the Layout window. When you have named your new report, click on the OK button. The Report Layout window will then be opened. Just close this window and your new report will be in the Layout window of your Reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note that these imported or custom reports are displayed with the [[File:New_new_button_without_arrow.JPG]] icon. These Report Layouts can be deleted, and customized without prompting you to create a copy. Therefore, we recommend that you also save the Report Layout File (*.rpl) somewhere outside of Ad Manager as a backup.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a report does not work after being imported, check to make sure it has been imported into the correct Report Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on exporting a report, [[Reports#Export a Report|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inventory Status Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Inventory Status report allows you to produce a snapshot of what is posted on your inventory on any past or current date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Inventory Status Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Face Current Posting and double-click on the Current Inventory Status Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Inventory_Status.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following Print Screen will then open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Inventory_Status_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;quot;As of &amp;quot; Date allows you to identify the beginning of the time frame you wish to print the Inventory Status Report for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, select the check box for Selection Criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lease Information Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Lease Revenue Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Lease Revenue Report allows the user to identify how much revenue is being generated by each Face on a Lease during a specified time period.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Lease Revenue Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Financial - Lease Revenue and double-click on the Standard Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Revenue.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following Print Screen will then open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Revenue_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For this report to run, you must identify the range of Postings start dates you wish to include in the report. The output will identify all Contracts assigned to each Face during this period, along with the amout it was sold for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to filter your report further, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter will allow you to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to include only those items you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays items which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of items reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your filter parameters, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Location List Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Location List report is an advance list identifying which faces have been selected for a particular Subcontract and Contract. It provides planned delivery information along with a listing of when faces are due to be posted and covered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Location List report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Performance - Location List and choose the layout you wish to run.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Location_List.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Revised Location List (Canadian)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Revised Location List is used when reporting any changes to the campaign since the original Location List was printed. It contains all the information in the Location List and allows you to highlight (manually) any revisions. It does not automatically identify any changes made since a previous list was printed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Location List (Circulation Summary)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Circulation Summary option provides circulation information at the end of the report summarizing the the Circulation this showing (total and average), the Plant Average circulation, and how much over (or under) the average is being delivered on this contract. Note that the plant average circulations shown are not calculated but taken from the information input in the media type database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintenance Outstanding Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Paper Withdrawal Summary Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Paper Withdrawal Summary Report provides the Plant with a list of all the Advertisers, and quantities of Designs required to complete Posting Tasks during a specified time frame. The quantity of copies needed of each creative and the BIN where they are stored is listed next to the Design Name. In order to run this report, you must specify the desired time frame. All creative that is needed to complete Posting Tasks that are due in this time frame will be listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Paper Withdrawal Summary Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Posting Tasks and double-click on the Paper Withdrawal Summary Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Paper_Withdrawal_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter allows the user to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to only those Designs on Posting Tasks you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays Designs for Posting Tasks which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of Designs reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can choose to see all Designs, or only those involving a Posting, Re-post or those involving a Take Down/Cover. You can also specify the Date(s) you want to print your list for. The report will only list the Designs for those Posting Tasks where the Due Date is within the date range specified. If no date range is entered under Due Date, every Design for every Posting Task in Ad Manager will be printed (subject to your other criteria).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also choose to filter which Designs to include by selecting the desired items. For example, you may only wish to produce a list of Designs for Posting Tasks assigned to a certain Bill Poster, or select Posting Tasks where the Design is to originate from a particular source plant.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have set all your desired criteria, click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Posting Card Summary Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Posting Card Summary Report provides information on the number of Posting Tasks that have been completed during a specified time frame and the number of posting cards printed for that time frame. This report shows the number of Posting Tasks by Subcontract, Market, grouped by Media Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Posting Card Summary Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Posting Tasks and double-click on the Posting Card Summary (by Media) Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Posting_Card_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter allows the user to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to only those Posting Tasks you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays Posting Tasks which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of Posting Tasks reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Due Date is required to be identified in order to generate a Posting Card Summary Report. In this field you can select the desired start date of the report; all Faces which were to be posted on or before this date will be listed. You can also select a range of dates here by selecting the &amp;quot;between&amp;quot; option. This will allow you to display all Postings occurring during the Due Date range selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your filter parameters, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Postings by Contract ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Postings by Contract report provides a listing of posting dates and information for each face on a Contract for a specified date range.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Postings by Contract Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Posting Tasks and double-click on the Postings by Contract Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Postings_by_Contract.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following Print Screen will open:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Postings_by_Contract_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter allows the user to identify the parameters which will shorten the listing to only those contracts which you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays contracts which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of contracts reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are searching for a particular contract, then identifying the contract number will quickly achieve that objective. Go to the Contract Tab and select &amp;quot;=&amp;quot; in the Number field, then enter the location number in the field next to it. However, the only contract that will be displayed in your report will be that one. If you require a listing of a particular advertiser, go to the Contract Tab and select the advertiser from the pulldown menu of the advertiser field. There are many, many fields you can select for your filter. If you wish to filter on a specific field, then specify what you want to review in that field. If you leave a field blank, then the search will not be dependant on that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Postings by Date ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Postings by Date report allows you to produce a listing of all the Posting Tasks that occurred/will occur on each date during a specified time frame. In order to run this report, you must specify the desired time frame. All Posting Tasks that have been completed in this time frame will be listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Postings by Date Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Posting Tasks and double-click on the Postings by Date Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Postings_by_Date.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following Print Screen will open:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Postings_by_Date_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter allows the user to identify the parameters which will shorten the listing to only those Posting Tasks which you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays posting tasks which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of posting tasks reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are searching for a particular contract, then identifying the contract number will quickly achieve that objective. Go to the Contract Tab and select &amp;quot;=&amp;quot; in the Number field, then enter the location number in the field next to it. However, the only Contract that will be displayed in your report will be that one. If you require a listing of a particular advertiser, go to the Contract Tab and select the advertiser from the pulldown menu of the advertiser field. There are many, many fields you can select for your filter. If you wish to filter on a specific field, then specify what you want to review in that field. If you leave a field blank, then the search will not be dependant on that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Posting in Progress Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Postings In Progress Report identifies Faces which were supposed to be posted by the specified date but completed on dates have not been keyed into Ad Manager yet. The listing identifies the Face, Contract, Due Date and Advertiser and is grouped by Media Type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Postings In Progress Report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Operational - Posting Tasks and double-click on the Postings In Progress Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Postings_in_Progress.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a report based on other criteria, click on the Selection Criteria check box. The filter allows the user to identify the parameters that will shorten the listing to only those Posting Tasks you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays Posting Tasks which meet your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of Posting Tasks reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Due Date is required to be identified in order to generate a Postings In Progress Report. In this field you can select the desired start date of the report; all Faces which were to be posted on or before this date will be listed. You can also select a range of dates here by selecting the &amp;quot;between&amp;quot; option. This will allow you to display all Faces that were to be posted but were not during the Due Date range selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are searching for a Face in one Contract in particular, then identifying the Face Number and Media Type will quickly achieve that objective. However, the only Face which you will be able to see will be that one. If you require a listing of a particular area or route, a more general filter request may be more appropriate. There are several different fields which you can select for your filter parameters. If you wish to filter by a specific field, then specify what you want to review in that field. If you leave a field blank, then the filter will not be dependent on that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some fields may already have information selected in them. Should you wish to change any of these inputs you can do so by inputting new information into these fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your filter parameters, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Printing Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
To use reports, click on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. This will open the Reports Window. From here, reports can be selected, customized, run, printed and exported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Reports.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Ad Manager Reports window is divided into two sections, the left side is the Folder List, and the right side is the Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All reports fall into one of the categories listed in the Folder List. You can select the category (Inventory, Operational, Performance, Sales, etc.) of reports you wish to print from the Folder List. Click on any category and the List window will show all reports available for that category. For example, the above window shows all available reports for the category Performance.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Report|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run a particular report, double-click on the name of the report in the Layout Window. The following Print dialog box will now appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Reports_print.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From this screen, you must set up your report and then print it or export it for use in another piece of software (such as Word or Excel). Note that depending upon which report you select the window could contain different fields and selection criteria. Click on the Selection Criteria check box to be shown the appropriate filtering options for the report you have selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filter allows the user to identify the parameters which will shorten the listing to only those listings which you wish to see. Since the filter command only displays information which meets your criteria, the more parameters you identify, the more specific your request and the shorter the list of items reported on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are searching for a particular contract, then identifying the contract number will quickly achieve that objective. Go to the Contract Tab and select &amp;quot;=&amp;quot; in the Number field, then enter the location number in the field next to it. However, the only contract that will be displayed in your report will be that one. If you require a listing of a particular advertiser, go to the Contract Tab and select the advertiser from the pulldown menu of the advertiser field. There are many, many fields you can select for your filter. If you wish to filter on a specific field, then specify what you want to review in that field. If you leave a field blank, then the search will not be dependant on that field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have determined your search parameters, select OK. By clicking on the OK button, all Faces, Designs, Subcontracts, Contracts, and Posting Tasks in your database will be compared to your search guidelines. If when the report is printed or previewed there is no information displayed, then your search parameters were too specific, and none of the information in your database matched these criteria. You will need to go back to Selection Criteria and change your filter criteria to be less specific, or click on the Clear button to clear the filter criteria all together.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to reduce the amount of information listed on your report because you were not specific enough, select Selection Criteria again. At this point, specify additional criteria which will reduce the list further.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Common Features of All Report Print Windows ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the Selection Criteria option (as shown above) if you wish to filter for specific data on your report. The filter works exactly the same way as all other filters in Ad Manager. The Filter screen offers you a multitude of selections to help streamline the data displayed on your report. Once you have specified the criteria for your filter, hit the OK button. The Selection Criteria check box should now have a checkmark in it, indicating that you have set up a filter.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ordering Your Report ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Reports#Sorting in Reports|Sorting in Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Previewing Your Report ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to view the report on your screen before printing it, click on the Preview button. The report may take a few minutes to generate. Please be patient. Once you have finished viewing your report, click on the Print button to send it to your printer. If you decide that you need to change your selection criteria or order, close the preview of your report to return to the Print Window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note, Ad Manager's Reports can work behind the scene's as you can work on other Ad Manager functions while waiting for the preview screen to open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Printing Your Report ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Print button allows you to print your report to a printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that there are some custom reports built for specific countries' or companies' unique needs or languages. Be careful in your selection as the formulae for certain calculations may differ from Standard reports provided.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Exporting Your Report To Another Application Format ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to export this report for use in another software, click on the Export button. A Save As window will open. Here you must select the place you wish to save the file. Choose the name for the file and type it in the File Name field as shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Report_Export.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected a file type, given it a name and identified a place to save it, click on the Save button. To open the report in a Word type software save as a text file (*.txt). To open in a spreadsheet software like Excel, save as a Microsoft Excel File (*.xls) type. To create an Adobe file for easy e-mailing to clients and staff, save as an Adobe PDF File (*.pdf) type.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Printer Setup ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Setup button brings up the Print Setup screen. From here, you may select your printer options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Canceling Your Report Selection ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cancel button allows you to close the Print window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Report Types ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Design Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reports in this section are related to design management. Key reports in this section are the:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Design Activities Report|Design Activities report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Design List&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Financial Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reports in this section deal with Billing and Leasing information. A key report in this section is the:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Lease Revenue Report|Lease Revenue report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These reports range from simple printed lists of each database in the system as well as more detailed reports in the major databases such as Sites and Faces. Key reports in this section are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faces - Standard Photo Sheet &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Faces - List&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Map Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As the name implies, this area contains the mapping reports that can be exported as a PDF file for e-mailing to clients or printing on your color printer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Operational Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Operational reports are primarily posting related. Key reports in this section are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Posting Card Summary Report|Posting Cards]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Posting Instructions&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Posting Tasks reports&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Inventory Status Report|Inventory Status report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Performance Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These reports are designed to provide information on delivery of subcontracts. Key reports in this section are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Campaign Summary Report|Campaign Summary]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Location List Report|Location Lists]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Proof of Performance Report|Proof of Performance report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sales Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reports in this section are designed to provide summary information you may need for day-to-day operations and planning. Key reports in this section are the:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Available Locations Report|Available Locations report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Contracted Open Space Reports|Contracted Open Space reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Scheduled Open Space|Scheduled Open Space reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Reports#Time Space Report|Time Space reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Subcontracts - [[Reports#Scheduling Summary Report|Scheduling Summary]] (both overview and detailed version)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Proof of Performance Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
There are 2 main layouts for performance reports, Proof of Performance (Cdn) and Proof of Performance (Standard).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proof of Performance (Cdn) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the Canadian version of the Performance report. It is a COMB (Canadian Outdoor Measurement Bureau) approved report that is to be used by Canadian plant operators for proof of performance reporting purposes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run this report, go to the Reports window, go to Performance - Performance and double-click on the Proof of Performance (Cdn) report in the Layout window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Proof_of_Performance_CDN.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on Printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the report, the information in the bottom half of the screen displays the Posted and Covered information instead of the Start and End information on the Location List.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The report is used to provide information on what has been delivered for this contract as of a certain date. The information in the Market Summary box contains calculations as of the date of the report. Locations that have not yet been covered in the software are displayed without a cover date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Proof of Performance (Standard) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run this report, go to the Reports window, go to Performance - Performance and double-click on the Proof of Performance (Standard) report in the Layout window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Proof_of_Performance_Standard.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on Printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the report, the information in the bottom half of the screen displays the Posted and Covered information instead of the Start and End information on the Location List.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The report is used to provide information on what has been delivered for this contract as of a certain date. The information in the Market Summary box contains calculations as of the date of the report. Locations that have not yet been covered in the software are displayed without a cover date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Overrides ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This report shows the number of days over or over and under delivery for each face on a Contract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Repairs Completion Summary ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Revenue and Cost Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Running Daily Routing Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduled Open Space ==&lt;br /&gt;
This report provides information on what space has been CHARTED not allocated based on sales information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For availability based on Contract information, see [[Reports#Contracted Open Space Reports|Contracted Open Space Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Scheduled Open Space Report provides information on how many faces have been scheduled and how many are available in each of your markets over future time frames.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Scheduled Open Space Reports, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Sales and choose either Scheduled Open Space (12 Periods) or Scheduled Open Space (24 Periods).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screen shows the various Layouts in the Scheduled Open Space (12 Periods) category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Scheduled_Open_Space_12.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screen shows the various Layouts in the Scheduled Open Space (24 Periods) category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Scheduled_Open_Space_24.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have double-clicked on the Layout you want, the following Print Screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Scheduled_Open_Space_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Scheduled Open Space Report, you must select a time interval and a start date. All other items are optional, however...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time Interval - Select the time period for reporting, by clicking on the button next to the desired time interval. The selections are Every 5 days, One, Five, Ten days..., Weekly, Twice a month, and Monthly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start Date - The Start Date field allows you to identify the beginning of the time frame for which you wish to print the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filter Subcontracts - If you wish to produce a report based on specific Subcontract information, select this check box and choose your filter options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ignore Dead Proposals, Proposals, Limited Holds (Expired) - This option allows you to choose whether you wish proposals and expired holds to be included in the numbers produced on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media - This option allows you to identify the media type on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Area - This option allows you to identify the area on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Market - Identify the market on which you wish to run the report in the Market field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
City - This option allows you to identify the city on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filter Faces - If you wish to produce a report based on specific face information, select this check box and choose your filter options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Include Non-saleable, Retired, Inactive, Not Installed Faces - If you wish to see include non-active faces to your report, click the check box next to this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Areas grouped by market Layout ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This Layout provides information on the number of faces available in each area of your plant, allowing you to determine your expected occupancy in each area based on charting information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling Summary Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Scheduling Summary Report provides information on the current status of your Subcontracts, what has been scheduled and what needs to be scheduled. From here you can determine the status of upcoming Subcontracts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Scheduling Summary report, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Sales - Subcontracts and choose the Scheduling Summary Layout or the Scheduling Summary (Detailed) Layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Scheduling_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on Printing the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Scheduling Summary (Detailed) ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to produce a Scheduling Summary that identifies all faces scheduled to Contracts, in addition to the Subcontract status, select the Scheduling Summary (Detailed) Layout. This will provide a listing of every face scheduled for each contract along with its scheduled design.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Sorting in Reports ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sorting in Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To display the data on your report in a specific order, click on the Order button on the Print Screen of your report.&lt;br /&gt;
Each report is divided into groups of data. Each of these groups can be ordered. The example below shows the Order Screen of a [[Reports#Location List Report|Location List Report]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Order.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To sort a specific group of items in the report, highlight the group name (for example, Subcontract Posting Schedules) in the Groups Box. The current order for this group in the report is displayed in the &amp;quot;Order the selected group by&amp;quot; box. On this Location List Report example, if there is more than one Posting Schedule to the Subcontract, the Posting Schedule will be ordered first by Area then by Site at, then by the Start Date, then by the End Date.&lt;br /&gt;
In the above example, to change the order the Posting Schedules are displayed for each Subcontract, go to the &amp;quot;Order the selected group by&amp;quot; box and click the [[File:New_add_button.JPG]] button to add a column to sort by, or highlight the field you do not want to sort by and click on the [[File:New_delete_button.JPG]] button. If you want to move the fields around, highlight the one you want in a different order and use the arrow keys to move it up [[File:New_move_up_button.JPG]] or down [[File:New_move_down_button.JPG]] the list of sorting criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
If you want any fields ordered in descending order, highlight the field and double-click it under the Descending column. A &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; will be displayed in the Descending column if you have chosen to order that field in descending order. To change a descending order to ascending, double-click the field in the Descending column so that the &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; is no longer there.&lt;br /&gt;
When you are done ordering your report, click on the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Time Space Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Time Space Report provides a graph on a face-by-face basis of what has been scheduled and posted. This can provide an easy reference to determine what the availability of faces will be in the future.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Time Space Reports, open the Reports window by clicking on the Reports [[File:New_reports_button.JPG]] button. Then go to Sales and choose Time Space (12 Periods).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following screen shows the various Layouts in the Time Space (12 Periods) category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Time_Space.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have double-clicked on the Layout you want, the following Print Screen will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Time_Space_print.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To run the Time Space Report, you must select a time interval, a start date and display options, all other criteria is optional. However...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Time Interval - Select the time period for reporting, by clicking on the radial dial next to the desired time interval. The selections are Every 5 days, One, Five, Ten days..., Weekly, Twice a month, and Monthly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Start Date - The Start Date field allows you to identify the beginning of the time frame for which you wish to print the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filter Postings - If you wish to produce a report based on specific posting information, select this check box and choose your filter options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media - This option allows you to identify the media type on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Area - This option allows you to identify the area on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Market - Identify the market on which you wish to run the report in the Market field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
City - This option allows you to identify the city on which you wish to run the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Filter Faces - If you wish to produce a report based on specific face information, select this check box and choose your filter options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Include Non-saleable, Retired, Inactive, Not Installed Faces - If you wish to see include non-active faces to your report, click the check box next to this option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Display Options - This option gives you the ability to choose what information from the scheduling you wish to display on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print the report, see [[Reports#Printing Reports|Printing Reports]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Verify Lease Data Report ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager</id>
		<title>Installing Ad Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager"/>
				<updated>2023-04-19T12:15:06Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Possible .NET Framework Issue */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are installing Ad Manager for the first time, you may follow this set of steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation and set up for SQL===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you will need to have a Microsoft SQL Server environment available.  As of March 2016, Ad Manager is certified up to all versions of SQL to 2014.  You may use SQL Express if you wish (please note that if using SQL Express there is a database size limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012, 4GB for 2005 and 2GB for earlier versions. This is per database and is a limit imposed by Microsoft).  SQL needs to be configured for TCP/IP and named Pipes.  Please ensure backups are set up once the databases are in place.  For instructions on the steps to follow, go to [[How to set up SQL for Ad Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have been provided with an Ad Manager database (converted data or transferred file), add both the main database and the images database (suffixed by _bin) to SQL.  Assign user rights as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Install Ad Manager===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download the newest version of the Ad Manager Client installer (AdMgr.msi) by contacting a Dot2Dot representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place this Ad Manager installer in a location where you can access it on the machine(s) you wish to install it on. Ad Manager can be implemented in a terminal services environment if desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new version of Ad Manager on each local machine by following the prompts.  If you do not have Scala Content Manager, leave the default as 10.x&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have finished installing Ad Manager on each machine, you can use one of these machines to create your Ad Manager database in SQL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click the Ad Manager icon. You may be asked to supply your serial number and license files.  If this is the case, please select the dongle (serial number) and license files provided as appropriate. Once you have a valid serial number (dongle) and license on this machine, you will be asked to log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Possible .NET Framework Issue&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be an issue where you receive an error message when trying to install the .NET 2.0 Framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this occurs, go to the Control Panel - Programs - Turn Windows features on or off.  Check &amp;quot;.NET Framework 3.5 (Includes .NET 2.0 and3.0). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:thumbnail_net35.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After doing this, try installing Ad Manager again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create/Select Database===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the appropriate user information. If you have an Ad Manager database installed on your SQL Server, enter its name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the database the user logging into Ad Manager must have sysadmin rights under the server roles of that users security rights. If you set SQL up to accept Windows authentication and added the user you are logged in as, you may simply check the &amp;quot;Use Windows Authentication&amp;quot; check box.  If you are using SQL authentication, enter the username and password for a user you have set up in SQL.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the Server name selected and enter a database name.  The Database name you enter will be what you want the system to create as your new database in SQL.  Ad Manager will notify you that you are creating a new database and will ask you some additional questions to help set up the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database is set up, Ad Manager will notify you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set up Remaining Machines===&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, you will be able to access Ad Manager from any machine. Each user will need to supply the serial and license files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database has been created all user accounts will have to be added to the database, Windows Authentication is considered the most secure security model. The users will not be able to access Ad Manager until their accounts have been created and a user mapping added to the Ad Manager database and _bin database.&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions or difficulties, please contact a Dot2Dot support representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Security===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a new user needs to be added to access Ad Manager, this can be done by [[Security_roles|adding the user in SQL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Thumbnail_net35.png</id>
		<title>File:Thumbnail net35.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Thumbnail_net35.png"/>
				<updated>2023-04-19T12:13:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager</id>
		<title>Installing Ad Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager"/>
				<updated>2023-04-19T12:13:28Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are installing Ad Manager for the first time, you may follow this set of steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation and set up for SQL===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you will need to have a Microsoft SQL Server environment available.  As of March 2016, Ad Manager is certified up to all versions of SQL to 2014.  You may use SQL Express if you wish (please note that if using SQL Express there is a database size limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012, 4GB for 2005 and 2GB for earlier versions. This is per database and is a limit imposed by Microsoft).  SQL needs to be configured for TCP/IP and named Pipes.  Please ensure backups are set up once the databases are in place.  For instructions on the steps to follow, go to [[How to set up SQL for Ad Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have been provided with an Ad Manager database (converted data or transferred file), add both the main database and the images database (suffixed by _bin) to SQL.  Assign user rights as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Install Ad Manager===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download the newest version of the Ad Manager Client installer (AdMgr.msi) by contacting a Dot2Dot representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place this Ad Manager installer in a location where you can access it on the machine(s) you wish to install it on. Ad Manager can be implemented in a terminal services environment if desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new version of Ad Manager on each local machine by following the prompts.  If you do not have Scala Content Manager, leave the default as 10.x&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have finished installing Ad Manager on each machine, you can use one of these machines to create your Ad Manager database in SQL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click the Ad Manager icon. You may be asked to supply your serial number and license files.  If this is the case, please select the dongle (serial number) and license files provided as appropriate. Once you have a valid serial number (dongle) and license on this machine, you will be asked to log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Possible .NET Framework Issue&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There may be an issue where you receive an error message when trying to install the .NET 2.0 Framework.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this occurs, go to the Control Panel - Programs - Turn Windows features on or off.  Check &amp;quot;.NET Framework 3.5 (Includes .NET 2.0 and3.0). &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After doing this, try installing Ad Manager again.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create/Select Database===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the appropriate user information. If you have an Ad Manager database installed on your SQL Server, enter its name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the database the user logging into Ad Manager must have sysadmin rights under the server roles of that users security rights. If you set SQL up to accept Windows authentication and added the user you are logged in as, you may simply check the &amp;quot;Use Windows Authentication&amp;quot; check box.  If you are using SQL authentication, enter the username and password for a user you have set up in SQL.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the Server name selected and enter a database name.  The Database name you enter will be what you want the system to create as your new database in SQL.  Ad Manager will notify you that you are creating a new database and will ask you some additional questions to help set up the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database is set up, Ad Manager will notify you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set up Remaining Machines===&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, you will be able to access Ad Manager from any machine. Each user will need to supply the serial and license files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database has been created all user accounts will have to be added to the database, Windows Authentication is considered the most secure security model. The users will not be able to access Ad Manager until their accounts have been created and a user mapping added to the Ad Manager database and _bin database.&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions or difficulties, please contact a Dot2Dot support representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Security===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a new user needs to be added to access Ad Manager, this can be done by [[Security_roles|adding the user in SQL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager</id>
		<title>Installing Ad Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager"/>
				<updated>2020-09-25T15:14:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are installing Ad Manager for the first time, you may follow this set of steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation and set up for SQL===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you will need to have a Microsoft SQL Server environment available.  As of March 2016, Ad Manager is certified up to all versions of SQL to 2014.  You may use SQL Express if you wish (please note that if using SQL Express there is a database size limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012, 4GB for 2005 and 2GB for earlier versions. This is per database and is a limit imposed by Microsoft).  SQL needs to be configured for TCP/IP and named Pipes.  Please ensure backups are set up once the databases are in place.  For instructions on the steps to follow, go to [[How to set up SQL for Ad Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have been provided with an Ad Manager database (converted data or transferred file), add both the main database and the images database (suffixed by _bin) to SQL.  Assign user rights as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Install Ad Manager===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download the newest version of the Ad Manager Client installer (AdMgr.msi) by contacting a Dot2Dot representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place this Ad Manager installer in a location where you can access it on the machine(s) you wish to install it on. Ad Manager can be implemented in a terminal services environment if desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new version of Ad Manager on each local machine by following the prompts.  If you do not have Scala Content Manager, leave the default as 10.x&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have finished installing Ad Manager on each machine, you can use one of these machines to create your Ad Manager database in SQL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click the Ad Manager icon. You may be asked to supply your serial number and license files.  If this is the case, please select the dongle (serial number) and license files provided as appropriate. Once you have a valid serial number (dongle) and license on this machine, you will be asked to log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create/Select Database===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the appropriate user information. If you have an Ad Manager database installed on your SQL Server, enter its name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the database the user logging into Ad Manager must have sysadmin rights under the server roles of that users security rights. If you set SQL up to accept Windows authentication and added the user you are logged in as, you may simply check the &amp;quot;Use Windows Authentication&amp;quot; check box.  If you are using SQL authentication, enter the username and password for a user you have set up in SQL.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the Server name selected and enter a database name.  The Database name you enter will be what you want the system to create as your new database in SQL.  Ad Manager will notify you that you are creating a new database and will ask you some additional questions to help set up the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database is set up, Ad Manager will notify you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set up Remaining Machines===&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, you will be able to access Ad Manager from any machine. Each user will need to supply the serial and license files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database has been created all user accounts will have to be added to the database, Windows Authentication is considered the most secure security model. The users will not be able to access Ad Manager until their accounts have been created and a user mapping added to the Ad Manager database and _bin database.&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions or difficulties, please contact a Dot2Dot support representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Security===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a new user needs to be added to access Ad Manager, this can be done by [[Security_roles|adding the user in SQL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Configuring_Billposter_App_in_Ad_Manager</id>
		<title>Configuring Billposter App in Ad Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Configuring_Billposter_App_in_Ad_Manager"/>
				<updated>2020-02-07T13:33:25Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Create Web Users */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;After you have [[Setting_up_Web_access#Web_Role|set up the web roles]], you can set up a billposter account in Ad Manager for use with the billposter app. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create Web Account==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you will need to create a Web Account.  This is done by going to the List view and going to Public Folders-Web-All Accounts.  Right click in the detail view, click New and add an account name (&amp;quot;All&amp;quot; is recommended).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click Save.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create Web Users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still have the Web Account page open, click on the Users page and click the New button. Otherwise, go to Public Folders-Web-All Users and right click in the detail view and click &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add Web User.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is blank, select the account and enter the name of the person you want to have gain access to the billposter app.  Click Change Password and enter a password for the user.  Click Save, but do not close the Web User window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, click the Roles page and click the New button.  Select &amp;quot;Billposter&amp;quot; as the Role, and Save the Web User. Once you have selected the role, double click on the role to associate this web user login with an Ad Manager billposter/salesperson. If this step is not completed, there will be no data available for the billposter or the salesperson to be able to review in the billposter app or proposal maker applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectRoles.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, you can now [[Setting_up_Billposter_App|install and configure the app]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Setting_up_Web_access</id>
		<title>Setting up Web access</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Setting_up_Web_access"/>
				<updated>2019-12-18T19:18:45Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;When using the various Ad Manager web interfaces, users need to be created in the system.  This allows you to control access to data within the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Web Role=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5.7.4 and later==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In order to set up the web roles in Ad Manager, you will need to import them into the system.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To import the web roles, go to the server hosting WAMP.  In the \api directory of the web Ad Manager tools you will find a file called app.xml.  Copy this file to a location where you can access it from within Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Log into Ad Manager and go to Tools-Import Web App... and select the app.xml file.  The web roles will now be in Ad Manager for you to select from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To assign a user, go to the Roles page, click New and select the desired role for this user.  The selected role will affect which web access points the user will be able to see.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==5.7.3 and earlier==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A role called &amp;quot;Ad Manager Web User&amp;quot; needs to exist for a user to be set up with the appropriate access.  To create a new web role, go to File - New - Web Role (you will need to scroll to the end).  Enter the name &amp;quot;Ad Manager Web User&amp;quot; and Save.  Go to the Users tab and click the New button.  From here, click OK to see a list of web users that have been created.  Select the web user to add and click OK, then save and close the Web Role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting up Billposter Accounts in Ad Manager (all versions)==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the Web Role information has been imported into Ad Manager, users can now [[Configuring_Billposter_App_in_Ad_Manager|Set up billposter accounts in Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Online Sharing=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition to setting up web roles, Ad Manager must also be configured to point to the correct Web Host Configuration.  To do this, go to Tools-Options-Online Sharing.  The connection name entered here '''must''' match the connection name entered during the [[How_to_Configure_a_Web_Ad_Manager_Server#Configure_the_database_connections_for_the_Web_Host_service|Web Host Configuration]] process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, if you are using the &amp;quot;[[Sharing_a_Proposal_Online|Location List]]&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;[[Sharing_POP_Online|POP]]&amp;quot; online sharing features, you must enter the URL that will be the root portion of the link to be sent to clients (e.g. http ://myoutdoorcompanyname.com/'''ad-manager''' , where '''ad-manager''' is the name of the folder created [[How_to_Configure_a_Web_Ad_Manager_Server#Configure_Apache|when configuring Apache]], and where the website files were placed).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Adding Users=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When adding a web user, you can associate it to a web account and to a web role.  This will allow our web interfaces to authenticate users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you still have the Web Account page open, click on the Users page and click the New button. Otherwise, go to Public Folders-Web-All Users and right click in the detail view and click &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Add Web User.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the account is blank, select the account and enter the name of the person you want to have gain access to the billposter app.  Click Change Password and enter a password for the user.  Click Save, but do not close the Web User window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Next, click the Roles page and click the New button.  Select &amp;quot;Billposter&amp;quot; as the Role, and Save the Web User.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectRoles.PNG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have selected the role, double click on the role to associate this web user login with an Ad Manager billposter/salesperson.  If this step is not completed, there will be no data available for the billposter or the salesperson to be able to review in the billposter app or proposal maker applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have issues with setting up the web user, please contact  Dot2Dot support staff for assistance.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool</id>
		<title>XML Mapping Export Tool</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool"/>
				<updated>2019-09-12T19:06:58Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== USING THE XML MAPPING EXPORT TOOL IN AD MANAGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 1:  In order to use the XML Mapping Export Tool, users must first make sure that the inventory has been “geocoded” and contains  data in the Latitude and Longitude columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 2:  In order to import the XML file to either Google and/or Bing maps, users must have an account with the respective web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	The XML Mapping Export Tool can be run from a list, basket and/or finder of objects which contain the Latitude and Longitude data (e.g. Faces, Sites, Players, Postings, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	To run the Tool, click Tools&amp;gt; XML Mapping Export and choose either Export (to export all in the list) or Export Selection (to export only those that have been selected in the list).&lt;br /&gt;
•	This will open the XML Mapping Export window.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Latitude and Longitude Columns from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Title Column(s) by clicking the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Description Column(s) by click the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  These columns will be part of the export and will appear in the legend of the map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Feed Type as appropriate for the desired use of the map data.&lt;br /&gt;
o	NOTE:  Google Chrome will need the Feed Type to be KML in order to import.&lt;br /&gt;
•	To enter the Output folder/path, click the ellipses button to the right of the field.  Choose the folder to save in and name the file.  Click Save and the folder/path will be displayed in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  It is recommended that the Output folder/path be one that can be accessed by all users rather than a personal one on the local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; and Ad Manager will create the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; to close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  If desired, users may wish to rename the newly created file with a more descriptive name rather than the number as it will display on the Google map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Launch Internet Explorer and choose the website into which you are going to import the data.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Log in to your account on the chosen website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  In this example Google Chrome was chosen and the following steps relate to that website.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  This file can also be e-mailed to a mail recipient for them to open in their desired map website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	go to www.maps.google.com.  Click on the menu button on the top left (3 horizontal lines)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Gmaps0.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on the “Your Places” option (you may need to sign in with a Google account in order to see/use this option).  Click Maps&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Gmaps1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	At the bottom, click on the “Create Map” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “import”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “Select a file from your computer” to browse to where you saved the Ad Manager file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the file and click &amp;lt;Open&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
•	If the file is too large, Google will notify you as to how many records will open. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Google will load the file of “dots” and display the object(s) on the map, as well as a legend of the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Enter a Title for the map, if desired, as well as a description in the corresponding fields.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Users can also use the Google map features to edit the style, labels, etc. on the layer that has been created.  However, if this is done, the legend may no longer display.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool</id>
		<title>XML Mapping Export Tool</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool"/>
				<updated>2019-09-12T19:06:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== USING THE XML MAPPING EXPORT TOOL IN AD MANAGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 1:  In order to use the XML Mapping Export Tool, users must first make sure that the inventory has been “geocoded” and contains  data in the Latitude and Longitude columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 2:  In order to import the XML file to either Google and/or Bing maps, users must have an account with the respective web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	The XML Mapping Export Tool can be run from a list, basket and/or finder of objects which contain the Latitude and Longitude data (e.g. Faces, Sites, Players, Postings, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	To run the Tool, click Tools&amp;gt; XML Mapping Export and choose either Export (to export all in the list) or Export Selection (to export only those that have been selected in the list).&lt;br /&gt;
•	This will open the XML Mapping Export window.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Latitude and Longitude Columns from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Title Column(s) by clicking the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Description Column(s) by click the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  These columns will be part of the export and will appear in the legend of the map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Feed Type as appropriate for the desired use of the map data.&lt;br /&gt;
o	NOTE:  Google Chrome will need the Feed Type to be KML in order to import.&lt;br /&gt;
•	To enter the Output folder/path, click the ellipses button to the right of the field.  Choose the folder to save in and name the file.  Click Save and the folder/path will be displayed in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  It is recommended that the Output folder/path be one that can be accessed by all users rather than a personal one on the local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; and Ad Manager will create the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; to close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  If desired, users may wish to rename the newly created file with a more descriptive name rather than the number as it will display on the Google map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Launch Internet Explorer and choose the website into which you are going to import the data.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Log in to your account on the chosen website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  In this example Google Chrome was chosen and the following steps relate to that website.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  This file can also be e-mailed to a mail recipient for them to open in their desired map website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	go to www.maps.google.com.  Click on the menu button on the top left (3 horizontal lines)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Gmaps0.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on the “Your Places” option (you may need to sign in with a Google account in order to see/use this option).  Click Maps&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Gmaps1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	At the bottom, click on the “Create Map” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “import”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “Select a file from your computer” to browse to where you saved the Ad Manager file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the file and click &amp;lt;Open&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
•	If the file is too large, Google will notify you as to how many records will open. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Google will load the file of “dots” and display the object(s) on the map, as well as a legend of the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Enter a Title for the map, if desired, as well as a description in the corresponding fields.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Users can also use the Google map features to edit the style, labels, etc. on the layer that has been created.  However, if this is done, the legend may no longer display.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Gmaps1.png</id>
		<title>File:Gmaps1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Gmaps1.png"/>
				<updated>2019-09-12T19:05:03Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Gmaps0.png</id>
		<title>File:Gmaps0.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Gmaps0.png"/>
				<updated>2019-09-12T19:04:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool</id>
		<title>XML Mapping Export Tool</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool"/>
				<updated>2019-09-12T19:04:09Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* USING THE XML MAPPING EXPORT TOOL IN AD MANAGER */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== USING THE XML MAPPING EXPORT TOOL IN AD MANAGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 1:  In order to use the XML Mapping Export Tool, users must first make sure that the inventory has been “geocoded” and contains  data in the Latitude and Longitude columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 2:  In order to import the XML file to either Google and/or Bing maps, users must have an account with the respective web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	The XML Mapping Export Tool can be run from a list, basket and/or finder of objects which contain the Latitude and Longitude data (e.g. Faces, Sites, Players, Postings, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	To run the Tool, click Tools&amp;gt; XML Mapping Export and choose either Export (to export all in the list) or Export Selection (to export only those that have been selected in the list).&lt;br /&gt;
•	This will open the XML Mapping Export window.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Latitude and Longitude Columns from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Title Column(s) by clicking the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Description Column(s) by click the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  These columns will be part of the export and will appear in the legend of the map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Feed Type as appropriate for the desired use of the map data.&lt;br /&gt;
o	NOTE:  Google Chrome will need the Feed Type to be KML in order to import.&lt;br /&gt;
•	To enter the Output folder/path, click the ellipses button to the right of the field.  Choose the folder to save in and name the file.  Click Save and the folder/path will be displayed in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  It is recommended that the Output folder/path be one that can be accessed by all users rather than a personal one on the local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; and Ad Manager will create the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; to close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  If desired, users may wish to rename the newly created file with a more descriptive name rather than the number as it will display on the Google map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Launch Internet Explorer and choose the website into which you are going to import the data.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Log in to your account on the chosen website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  In this example Google Chrome was chosen and the following steps relate to that website.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  This file can also be e-mailed to a mail recipient for them to open in their desired map website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	go to www.maps.google.com.  Click on the menu button on the top left (3 horizontal lines)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on the “Your Places” option (you may need to sign in with a Google account in order to see/use this option).  Click Maps&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	At the bottom, click on the “Create Map” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “import”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “Select a file from your computer” to browse to where you saved the Ad Manager file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the file and click &amp;lt;Open&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
•	If the file is too large, Google will notify you as to how many records will open. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Google will load the file of “dots” and display the object(s) on the map, as well as a legend of the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Enter a Title for the map, if desired, as well as a description in the corresponding fields.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Users can also use the Google map features to edit the style, labels, etc. on the layer that has been created.  However, if this is done, the legend may no longer display.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool</id>
		<title>XML Mapping Export Tool</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/XML_Mapping_Export_Tool"/>
				<updated>2019-09-12T18:57:55Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* USING THE XML MAPPING EXPORT TOOL IN AD MANAGER */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
== USING THE XML MAPPING EXPORT TOOL IN AD MANAGER ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 1:  In order to use the XML Mapping Export Tool, users must first make sure that the inventory has been “geocoded” and contains  data in the Latitude and Longitude columns.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE 2:  In order to import the XML file to either Google and/or Bing maps, users must have an account with the respective web site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	The XML Mapping Export Tool can be run from a list, basket and/or finder of objects which contain the Latitude and Longitude data (e.g. Faces, Sites, Players, Postings, etc.).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	To run the Tool, click Tools&amp;gt; XML Mapping Export and choose either Export (to export all in the list) or Export Selection (to export only those that have been selected in the list).&lt;br /&gt;
•	This will open the XML Mapping Export window.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AM Shot -3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Latitude and Longitude Columns from the drop down list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Title Column(s) by clicking the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Description Column(s) by click the Properties button and choosing from the resulting list.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  These columns will be part of the export and will appear in the legend of the map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the Feed Type as appropriate for the desired use of the map data.&lt;br /&gt;
o	NOTE:  Google Chrome will need the Feed Type to be KML in order to import.&lt;br /&gt;
•	To enter the Output folder/path, click the ellipses button to the right of the field.  Choose the folder to save in and name the file.  Click Save and the folder/path will be displayed in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  It is recommended that the Output folder/path be one that can be accessed by all users rather than a personal one on the local computer.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; and Ad Manager will create the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 [[File:AM Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; to close the window.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  If desired, users may wish to rename the newly created file with a more descriptive name rather than the number as it will display on the Google map.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Launch Internet Explorer and choose the website into which you are going to import the data.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Log in to your account on the chosen website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  In this example Google Chrome was chosen and the following steps relate to that website.&lt;br /&gt;
•	NOTE:  This file can also be e-mailed to a mail recipient for them to open in their desired map website.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -1.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	go to maps.google.com&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -2.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on the “Your Places” option (you may need to sign in with a Google account in order to see/use this option).  Click Maps&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -3.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	At the bottom, click on the “Create Map” button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -4.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “import”.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -5.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Click on “Select a file from your computer” to browse to where you saved the Ad Manager file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -6.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
•	Select the file and click &amp;lt;Open&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
•	If the file is too large, Google will notify you as to how many records will open. &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Google will load the file of “dots” and display the object(s) on the map, as well as a legend of the data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Google Shot -7.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
•	Enter a Title for the map, if desired, as well as a description in the corresponding fields.&lt;br /&gt;
•	Users can also use the Google map features to edit the style, labels, etc. on the layer that has been created.  However, if this is done, the legend may no longer display.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0</id>
		<title>Ad Manager 2.0</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0"/>
				<updated>2019-05-06T11:21:06Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding an Organization]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding a User]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Changing User Privileges]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Campaigns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduling==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0</id>
		<title>Ad Manager 2.0</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0"/>
				<updated>2019-05-06T11:20:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: John.devonshire moved page 2.0 to Ad Manager 2.0: Better description&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Ad Manager 2.0 Online Help=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding an Organization]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding a User]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Changing User Privileges]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Campaigns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduling==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/2.0</id>
		<title>2.0</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/2.0"/>
				<updated>2019-05-06T11:20:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: John.devonshire moved page 2.0 to Ad Manager 2.0: Better description&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[Ad Manager 2.0]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0</id>
		<title>Ad Manager 2.0</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0"/>
				<updated>2019-05-06T11:18:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
=Ad Manager 2.0 Online Help=&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding an Organization]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding a User]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Changing User Privileges]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Campaigns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduling==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0</id>
		<title>Ad Manager 2.0</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0"/>
				<updated>2019-05-06T11:17:16Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Setup */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding an Organization]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding a User]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Changing User Privileges]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Campaigns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduling==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0</id>
		<title>Ad Manager 2.0</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_2.0"/>
				<updated>2019-05-06T11:16:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: Created page with &amp;quot;==Setup== # Adding an Organization # Adding a User  ==Locations==  ==Campaigns==  ==Scheduling==&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;==Setup==&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding an Organization]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Adding a User]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Campaigns==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Scheduling==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Release_Notes</id>
		<title>Ad Manager Release Notes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Release_Notes"/>
				<updated>2018-11-15T17:55:27Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Version 5.7.8==&lt;br /&gt;
* A custom prefix setting in the contract automatic numbering options has been added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.7 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The lease payment line item dialog box now offers a tool to automatically calculate the revenue allocated to the lease based on the payment period.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now track the status of a site with respect to state and local law (conforming on non-conforming).&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now classify leases by lease type which could make it a bit easier to prepare lease payments.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ad Manager now imports the media item validity dates specified in Content Manager and lets you search for reservations with invalid media.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now choose the conflicts to ignore when you drag and drop multiple faces onto a static sub-contract's &amp;quot;Assigned&amp;quot; list.&lt;br /&gt;
* The maximum length of the invoice and lease payment line items has been increased from 64 to 128 characters.&lt;br /&gt;
* The list views in the bill definition, invoice, lease payment schedule and lease payment details pages now remember any changes you have made to their column widths.&lt;br /&gt;
* The maximum number of columns you can select when customizing a list view has been extended from 32 to 48.&lt;br /&gt;
* You now have the option to exclude the century from the auto-generated contract numbers prefixed with a year.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed some issues with the &amp;quot;View digital open space&amp;quot; tool where it was displaying incorrect information or crashing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.6 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Switched from using the [https://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms810810.aspx#bkmk_DepMDAC_WDACComps deprecated] &amp;quot;Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server&amp;quot; (SQLOLEDB) data access component to the &amp;quot;Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC&amp;quot; (MSDASQL) in conjunction with the &amp;quot;SQL Server&amp;quot; ODBC driver (sqlsrv32.dll).&lt;br /&gt;
* Added features to support online proposal entry.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a tool to replace a salesperson on a selection of contracts, including the associated bill definitions and unfinalized invoices.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where playback counts were not retrieved correctly by the Content Manager synchronization services after moving players to a new Content Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where currency formats for the Arabic and Hebrew locales were not available in the Currency options tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the location-related sub-reports were not available when designing a reservation report layout.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the day part length was displayed incorrectly in the media set details widow.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where generating a .pdf from the online location list would fail if Digital Media (2) was not enabled in the license.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.5 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Publishing to Enterprise Content Manager now takes advantage of playlist API enhancements introduced in Content Manager 11.01.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now view the [[Digital_Open_Space|digital open space]] for a given segment and time frame as a list.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now see the contract's primary agency as a column in a list view.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now enter a list of email addresses to send invoices to for each agency.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now enter up to 1024 characters as a user field value (increased from 256 characters).&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now define user fields for inventory designs.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now track a size attribute for digital locations.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now enter a description of digital locations.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now search for digital reservations with conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
* It's now a bit harder to accidentally delete a user field.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Content Manager publishing service will now ignore SSL certificate errors when connecting via HTTPS.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the lease payment summaries incorrectly included voided payments in the &amp;quot;Paid&amp;quot; column.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where including the &amp;quot;Published On&amp;quot; column in a playlist or reservation list view could cause the list view to display incorrect information.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the Content Manager publishing service mishandled reservations ending today.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where members of certain access restricting roles could not access the options window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the reservation update tool was rounding the amounts entered in the &amp;quot;Value&amp;quot; field.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the digital budget did not display correctly in the contract &amp;quot;Value&amp;quot; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.4 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now limit the number of playlists being published to Content Manager to a specified time window.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now disable the tuning of all player outputs upon the startup of the Content Manager publishing service.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now configure multiple instances of the Content Manager synchronization services in order to handle multiple Ad Manager databases on the same machine.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now classify reservations as fixed, movable or preemptable.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now attach images to digital locations.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now attach documents to digital locations.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now find digital locations by reservation criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now see the digital subcontract requirements (target, budget, locations) as columns in list views.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now see tabs showing the digital locations and reservations in the Lease details window.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now enter more than 2 decimal digits in the Percentage field of the GL Code details tab&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where playlists were not generated correctly for certain reservation weekday combinations.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where it was impossible to restart the Content Manager synchronization services if they happened to crash.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the Content Manager publishing service would crash while publishing a media set reservation ad containing a media item that has been deleted from Content Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a potential runtime error in the log in dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where posting values were not calculated correctly when using rates with an increment greater than one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.3 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where list pages would not refresh when adding items (e.g. dropping a file onto the '''Attachments''' list).&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the number of players used was displayed incorrectly in the '''About''' box.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the text in the '''Name''' field of the '''Subcontract Design''' details window was not being automatically selected when the field got the keyboard focus.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the application could crash when republishing from a list of synchronization issues.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a time-out issue in the communication with Content Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved the usability of the Content Manager item browser tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Lists of Postings and Posting Tasks now load faster&lt;br /&gt;
* Changed Bill Allocation to occur on the Bill Definition, instead of a separate tool&lt;br /&gt;
* Added Bill Allocation for Digital (2) Subcontracts&lt;br /&gt;
* Users can now modify Visual Charting shading to hide posting schedules based on the shading definition.&lt;br /&gt;
* Track the Posting Task completion time, in addition to the date.&lt;br /&gt;
* Find un-approved Subcontract Designs, regardless of whether an approval was required.&lt;br /&gt;
* Subcontract Design start and end date fields and tracking added.&lt;br /&gt;
* Subcontract Designs now have User Fields&lt;br /&gt;
* Users can now sort the list of images in the Image Processing tool by folder or by name by clicking the column header.&lt;br /&gt;
* TAB OOH Ratings module:&lt;br /&gt;
** Added CBSA lookup on the Site&lt;br /&gt;
** Rename Eyes On to &amp;quot;TAB OOH Ratings&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
** Rename EOI 18+ on circulations to &amp;quot;Weekly Impressions 18+&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
* Optimized publishing speed for large quantities of playlists. Digital (2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Added the Republish tool to a number of locations within Ad Manager where users may wish to republish. Digital (2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Assign a playlist as a Content Manager 10 to the owner workgroup if the publishing service logs on as a user that is part of a workgroup. (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Publish information into the description field of a Content Manager playlist to make it easier to identify the corresponding player. (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Posting tools now available for the conflicting postings in the conflicts page of the posting details window&lt;br /&gt;
* Expose object version to support synchronization in mobile apps&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug fix: Ensure all items are properly published following a failed attempt to publish playlist. Digital (2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug fix: Ensure proper playlist cleanup following a failed publishing of playlists. (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug fix: Subcontract requirements page now saves values if you don't tab out of the field. (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug fix: finding synchronization issues by date doesn't work unless the issues are from today (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug fix: Context menu in the Items (Contracted) tab of the playlist details window not showing all the reservation tools. (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug fix: Adding an area distribution to a new subcontract before selecting a market no longer shows an error. (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
* Bug fix: An area now appears in the list of distribution factors after it has been removed from the list of selected factors. (Digital 2)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
*	Ad Manager’s new digital module now works with Scala’s Enterprise Content Manager version&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a new module to allow users to:&lt;br /&gt;
** share POP online&lt;br /&gt;
** share Proposals online&lt;br /&gt;
** view Posting Tasks online&lt;br /&gt;
*	Added the work order task note as a column in list views&lt;br /&gt;
*	Added the CBSA Market field in the Circulation tab of the Face details window&lt;br /&gt;
*	You can now track location-specific media item approvals&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fixed a bug that occurred when you specify that a loop should &amp;quot;play all&amp;quot; items from a for-sale segment, the player actually plays 1, instead of all&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fixed a bug where the frameset name could be easily exceeded.&lt;br /&gt;
*	Fixed a bug where the user would get a BOM Error 5 when copying, exporting or printing from a list view that contains deleted user field columns&lt;br /&gt;
*	Updated the Japanese translation of Ad Manager &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.7.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Ad Manager now offers a new digital media management module, which replaces (optionally) the existing digital media functionality. A few highlights of the new features:&lt;br /&gt;
** You can now drive multiple Scala Content Manager servers from a single Ad Manager database.&lt;br /&gt;
** Ad Manager now publishes its playlists to Content Manager in the background, continuously, in response to your scheduling activity.&lt;br /&gt;
** Ad Manager retrieves playback statistics from Content Manager automatically, in the background.&lt;br /&gt;
** You can now design the overall structure of your content loops as a sequence of segments (planning wheel), combining different categories of content - advertising and non-advertising.&lt;br /&gt;
** You no longer need to feed the non-advertising content through Ad Manager - your loops could include segments that are not populated by Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
** You can now target specific times of the day in a completely flexible manner - no pre-defined fixed day-parts.&lt;br /&gt;
** You can now schedule filler content to play when your advertising segments are under-booked.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Ad Manager documentation is now available online.&lt;br /&gt;
* When using '''Proximity Charting''' on a map, you can now schedule multiple faces at a time, instead of just one.&lt;br /&gt;
* In a '''Maintenance Work Order''' list view, in addition to '''Effort''', you can now see '''Labour''' and '''Material''' information as well.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now update the posting value options of multiple static subcontracts at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where, when using the '''Split''' tool on static subcontracts, the posting value options would not get copied over to the newly created subcontracts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.6.16 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now mark utility meter readings as &amp;quot;estimated&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where trying to drag in the &amp;quot;Virtual Faces&amp;quot; tab of the Site details window would result in a &amp;quot;type mismatch&amp;quot; error.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue causing the reporting print dialog box to take too long to display for certain reports.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where creating a new database would fail on SQL Server 2012.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the lease user fields were not available to select when customizing Site and Face list views.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where there was no way to enter a value for the &amp;quot;POP Due On&amp;quot; static subcontract field.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.6.15 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now import demographic data (provided by DM Squared) and use it to target your campaigns or see the demographic profile of the audience you’re reaching.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now input the sales taxes you need to charge in different jurisdictions. You can also mark agencies as exempt from some or all sales taxes.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue (introduced in version 5.6.14) where after upgrading the database all user-defined folders, filters and baskets in “Public Folders” would disappear.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue with the “Image processing” tool where it would fail when processing posting images if a posting has conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue with the the “Leases” and “Lessors” reports where their contact sub-reports would always be blank.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where creating a workspace item (folder, filter, or basket) with a duplicate name would produce a misleading error message.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5.6.14 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Scala Ad Manager is now Dot2Dot Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* You’ll need a new serial number and license, issued by Dot2Dot Communications Inc., when you upgrade.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you define static media rates, you’re no longer limited to daily rates; you can now define the rate as an amount per period of a length specified by you.&lt;br /&gt;
* You now have more flexibility in choosing how the value of static media posting schedules is calculated; you can apply a discount to the rate card value, specify custom rates or enter custom amounts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed the issues with rounding errors in static media posting value calculations.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now allocate a currency amount to a selection of posting schedules (static media), equally or proportionally, using the desired precision, without worrying about rounding errors.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now track Proof of Performance delivery dates for static media at the level of the subcontract design.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now add attachments to digital media subcontracts and to players.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now enter the addresses of your sales offices.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now use Ad Manager in French (Canada).&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now select the language of Ad Manager’s user interface from the “Tools -&amp;gt; Options” window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where “Tools -&amp;gt; XML Mapping Export” worked incorrectly when the computer’s regional settings specify a number format using a comma for the decimal point.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 6.0.12 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now associate digital players to a maintenance structure, to assist with maintenance tracking.&lt;br /&gt;
* Significantly sped up the operation of the Schedule Media Changes feature.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where the Supplier-properties were not available for displays in list views or reports.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 6 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem seen under Microsoft SQL Server 2008r2 where an error dialog stating &amp;quot;Incorrect syntax near 'TABBLOCKX'&amp;quot; could occur.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5.1.34 ==&lt;br /&gt;
''Note: Ad Manager 5.5.1.34 requires Content Manager 5.1.34 or newer!''&lt;br /&gt;
* When you specify the default playlist (what to play when there's nothing else scheduled to play), Ad Manager now allows you to specify a default playlist for each frame in the slot structure with the ability to override that for individual day-parts and triggers.&lt;br /&gt;
* If a Player loses connectivity, and all the scheduled content expires (without the Player receiving any new updates), the Player will now display the appropriate default playlist, instead of going black.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Contracted Open Space reports now show the custom subcontracted value (prorated over the periods presented in the reports).&lt;br /&gt;
* The Ad Manager APIs can now be accessed from Java code, using the j-interop library.&lt;br /&gt;
* If Content Manager synchronizes players while Ad Manager is publishing an update, in rare cases this could cause media to play elsewhere than scheduled. This is now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem when upgrading from the older Charting Pro software, where the automatic sequence numbers (for contracts, etc.) could get reset, resulting in out-of-order numbering.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where certain columns added by an extension module were not being offered in the column-picker.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where publishing playlists would fail with a &amp;quot;numeric overflow error&amp;quot;, for players whose ID was greater than 32767.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where using a time-trigger with a recurrence of &amp;quot;once&amp;quot; could lead to an &amp;quot;Object reference not set to an instance of an object&amp;quot; error during publishing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a &amp;quot;Key not in dictionary&amp;quot; error that could occur when selecting the default playlist.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5.1.20 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* When looking at faces or player slots, there are new columns available to show the rate information that is in effect today, based on the rate schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
* When updating contracts, static subcontracts, sites, or faces, it is now possible to also update the posting card note at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
* Updated the Category Sales Summary and Category/Advertiser Sales Summary report layouts to reflect the recent rate card improvements.&lt;br /&gt;
* If you invoke the Content Manager Connector from a non-interactive account (which could happen when using the Windows Task Scheduler), if the license file is not set up for that account, an error is now logged.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5.1.19 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Reports related to media items, e.g. proof-of-play reports, can now contain thumbnail images.&lt;br /&gt;
* The EYES ON Impressions fields support values up to one million.&lt;br /&gt;
* When a user schedules a media change for a reservation, the sequences of any pre-existing playlists will now be preserved.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where Ad Manager could incorrectly determine availability and overbooking, if you have defined slots for overlapping day-parts (e.g., &amp;quot;am&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;pm&amp;quot;, and &amp;quot;all-day&amp;quot;). Fixed the equivalent problem in the Digital Open Space tool.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed intermittent runtime error 80004005 that could occur upon closing Ad Manager in a terminal server environment.&lt;br /&gt;
* The multi-select Order as Required tool now will correctly order playlists that still have pending warnings.&lt;br /&gt;
* When applying a loop structure to a playlist, surplus items are evenly distributed among the various &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Any&amp;gt;&amp;quot; segments, and effectively-consecutive &amp;quot;&amp;lt;Any&amp;gt;&amp;quot; segments are merged so that adjacency-conflict rules can be applied.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where the Export Playlists to XML tool could lock up if an approved but empty media set was present in one of the playlists.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5.1.17 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where a user whose role is Ad Manager - Financial Leasing - Denied could still see lease details.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where if you customize a list view, then the properties of the &amp;quot;owner object&amp;quot; were unavailable. Now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Report templates displaying financial data no longer use the dollar-sign, which would be wrong when using other currencies.&lt;br /&gt;
* When using the Image Processing tool to load images in bulk, for postings you can specify if the image is the Closeup or the Approach image. For faces or sites images, you can specify if the image is the Primary Image or the Map Image.&lt;br /&gt;
* For static charting, the CBSA EOI weekly value for the 18+ demographic group can be stored and used. When charting, a total &amp;quot;daily&amp;quot; EOI is calculated and can be used as the scheduling target (the same as if GRP or DEC was used). The EOI 18+ value can be used to search and locate faces and sites.&lt;br /&gt;
** CBSA (Core Based Statistical Area) is defined by the United States Office of Management and Budget, a metropolitan area(s) within larger markets (e.g. DMAs) containing a substantial population nucleus, together with adjacent communities having a high degree of economic and social integration with that core. CBSA's are a standard geography for buying and selling media.&lt;br /&gt;
** EOIs - EYES ON Impressions are the total number of times people passing an OOH display are likely to notice the ad for either 12 hours (un-illuminated: 6:00 am to 6:00 pm), 18 hours (illuminated: 6:00 am to 12 midnight) or 24 hours. Unless specified as In-Market, EOIs include all persons who notice the unit, regardless of the origin of their trips. EOIs are reported in weekly increments.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where the Lease Payment Schedule default list views contained an invalid column which would cause attempts to export data to fail with an error message. You may still have to customize or reset any existing (saved) Lease Payment Schedule list views to make sure the invalid column — shown as &amp;quot;???&amp;quot; - is removed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where Ad Manager could crash when attempting to print certain reports.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5.1.6 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* The Maintenance (Site) property page of the Ad Manager Face Finder was listed twice. Now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Playlist Details window now shows to total loop length (in addition the the length of each entry, which was already shown).&lt;br /&gt;
* When auto-charting, any candidates that are skipped should have remained in the candidate list, but were being removed. Now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Digital proof-of-play reports can now show the times and weekdays that a media item is scheduled to play.&lt;br /&gt;
* When duplicating a site, you can now easily give the new site its own face numbers. The new face numbers will be based on the old face numbers, updated in a &amp;quot;search-and-replace&amp;quot; style based on the pattern you specify.&lt;br /&gt;
* When assigning designs, the board size is shown in the Assign Face dialog, to help in selecting the correct design.&lt;br /&gt;
* When customizing the view for the list of digital subcontracts, you can now add Subcontract (Digital) Notes as a column.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where the first image in the list could not be previewed in the Image Processing tool.&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Digital Subcontracts &amp;gt; Requirements, the Other Criteria were not being saved correctly. Now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Removed the Save and New button from the Subcontract &amp;gt; Flights page, where it did not belong.&lt;br /&gt;
* When working with images of faces, if you delete a newly-added image it could lead to an error message when saving the face. Now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where the E-Ad Manager module would not work unless the Static Media module had been enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Image Processing tool, if you type or paste a full path into the Folder field, the image list wasn't getting filled with the images in that path. This is now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Image Processing tool, fixed a problem where the Face(s) option was incorrectly ghosted, and fixed on &amp;quot;Object doesn't support this property or method&amp;quot; error dialog when searching on Face number.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5.1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* Ad Manager now runs under Windows 7 under a limited-user account.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ad Manager is now available in Japanese.&lt;br /&gt;
* When exporting a map (Tools &amp;gt; Save Map &amp;gt; Image Preview), Ad Manager now supplies a file-type extension.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Subcontract Design and Subcontract Media Item screens, you can now record and track when artwork was ordered, and from whom.&lt;br /&gt;
* In a digital subcontract, you can now use Tools &amp;gt; Schedule Media Changes on a selection of reservations to schedule intermittent or recurring media changes.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now use Ad Manager to manage content for an event trigger even if the frame it belongs to is not managed by Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* For static charting, you can now track rate adjustments at the posting level, and track posting values even if rate cards are not used.&lt;br /&gt;
* For digital charting, you can now track rate adjustments at the reservation level, and track reservation values even if rate cards are not used.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added new report layouts: Subcontract Media List and Subcontract Media Detailed List.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now use Tools &amp;gt; Image Processing to easily import large numbers of photos, for example proof-of-performance photos, into Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* Updated the Campaign and Standard Summary reports to use the new value and rate card value fields.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem with adding lookup items on the fly where Ad Manager would crash if you switched to a different property page after typing a new, previously undefined name into a drop-down list field, e.g. the Advertiser field in the Contract details window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a case where creating a new incident in the Maintenance module could crash.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where opening a recently created log from the Incident Details page could lead to a runtime error.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem in the XML Mapping Exporter, where the Latitude column was incorrectly labeled.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem on the SAMI Positions page where the &amp;quot;DEC(Opp)&amp;quot; column was showing the wrong data.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem in the Map tool where trying to add a face to a subcontract could lead to an &amp;quot;Error 13: Type mismatch&amp;quot; dialog box.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where you could not type time into a few of the time-fields in Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem when making an agency-contact report, where the contact names would not be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem when entering new player exceptions, where the time you entered into the form could jump back to midnight.&lt;br /&gt;
* The DEC(summary) and DEC(total) fields now show whole numbers. (Previously, they showed several decimal places, which had no meaning.) The GRP(summary) and GRP(total) fields now show two decimal places.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a run-time error that could occur when saving a revenue allocation's dollar amount.&lt;br /&gt;
* Improved the tooltips on the Digital Open Space Viewer to show reserved / available percentages with a more reasonable number of digits of precision.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where the default playlist would not be published if there were no playlists to publish for a player.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where a new posting task could change the previously recorded &amp;quot;taken down on&amp;quot; date.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a 'Data access' error that could occur when opening the Posting Tasks tab of a Design Activity window.&lt;br /&gt;
* When using start- and end-times to trim a video clip, the resulting duration of video clip is now shown, rather than the original duration.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where attempting the Complete... operation for a task could cause a Run-time error dialog.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem in the popup calendar where the next-month / previous-month buttons did not work if the selected date was for example the 31st and you tried to move into a shorter month.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a case where using the drop-down calendar could result in the wrong date being selected, if the month started on a Sunday.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where the Playlist Entry report could report a &amp;quot;Subscript out of range&amp;quot; runtime error.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you open an existing incident log entry, the log note is now displayed as read-only.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you resolve a task for an incident, the status is now refreshed in the incident window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed some cases where a user with read-only rights was still allowed to do certain things, such as edit the status of a maintenance task, reset a reservation's published status, move faces to a different site, or change the default indoor map for a face or player.&lt;br /&gt;
* When viewing a list of reservations, the Tools &amp;gt; Reset Published Status command is now enabled only when some reservations are selected.&lt;br /&gt;
* In filter dialogs, the list of property pages was not always alphabetical. This is now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5.0.8 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now multi-select several Subcontract Designs, and run the Update tool to modify attributes of several Subcontract Designs at once.&lt;br /&gt;
* Budget and rate card values are captured by the Sales History &amp;gt; Capture process, and are available in Contract Version lists, and reflected in the Contract Summary.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Design - Details form now includes a list of all Subcontracts that are linked to that design. You can double-click a Subcontract to open it.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Media Set - Details form now includes a list of all Subcontracts that are linked to that media set. You can double-click a Subcontract to open it.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added support for proximity charting of digital, and fixed problems in proximity charting for static, both in the mapping tool.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the mapping tool, there are new menu options View &amp;gt; Go to Contract and View &amp;gt; Go to Subcontract, when appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
* When importing photos, the images are now automatically down-scaled when needed, as specified on the new Images option page in Tools &amp;gt; Options. Choices include Original size, Large (1600 pixels), Medium (1024 pixels), Small (800 pixels), and Very small (640 pixels).&lt;br /&gt;
* When importing photos, additional formats such as TIFF and PNG are now supported.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Production Notes field is now visible and editable on the Static Subcontract form's Production tab.&lt;br /&gt;
* Attachments for faces, sites, contracts, subcontracts, designs, and leases were not being shown. Now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a layout problem in Tools &amp;gt; Options... on the Demographics page, where the Demographic Properties title was clipped.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where trying to save a new or updated virtual face configuration, would appear to complete, but actually did nothing.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a crash that could occur if you tried to modify the name of number of a Structure.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a rare bug in static charting where the list of candidates may refresh incorrectly when rate card values are calculated.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a bug where updating a field of the Site object fails if a Face of that site is open in a dialog at that time.&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 5, Release 5 ==&lt;br /&gt;
* After updating Ad Manager, there no longer is a separate database updater application. If a user with database-administration privileges logs in to the new Ad Manager, the database will be updated. Otherwise, the user is told to contact an administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
* Media Items now have Length and Length Override properties. The Name property was removed because it was redundant. The Media Item must now be associated with one from Content Manager to get length value. If the length cannot be determined in Content Manager the user must specify the media item length.&lt;br /&gt;
* Media Items now have a Folder property, specifying their folder within the Content Manager media library.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a media set length property which is calculated based on the length of media items in the media set.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added Media Set property First Published On which is displayed and can be used to find Media Sets which are published.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a media item update tool which refreshes the properties of selected media items from Content Manager. The tool is available for an individual media item, currently open media set or selection of media sets. It refreshes the thumbnail and the duration properties of the media item.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Check Playlists tool has been enhanced to let you search for reservations that exceed the intended length. The tool uses new filter properties on reservations to allow the user to identify media items that exceed their allowed reservation length.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added a Duplicate Media Set tool which is available from the main Ad Manager form when displaying a list of Media Set objects or when viewing the detail page for a Media Set object.&lt;br /&gt;
* In the Options dialog, under Content Manager, you can now specify the default playlist that should play when no media items are otherwise scheduled.&lt;br /&gt;
* When using maps, you can now map digital subcontracts, show available player slots for the subcontract, accept player slots, or release reservations.&lt;br /&gt;
* When using maps, you can export data in KML or GeoRSS XML format, which can be imported into other mapping tools, e.g. Google Maps.&lt;br /&gt;
* Outages of digital players (exceptions) can now be recorded. you can now search for reservations affected by exceptions. The Subcontract form will show any outages (exceptions), and the Exceptions form will show the affected Subcontracts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Rate cards can be created for player slots. You can specify standard, discount, premium, and minimum rates. Ad Manager will compute the value of a reservation using the rates you specify.&lt;br /&gt;
* Rate cards for static media can now be recorded. You can specify standard, discount, premium, and minimum rates. Ad Manager will compute the value of a posting (reservation) using the rates you specify.&lt;br /&gt;
* A new tool, View Digital Open Space, lets you see what ad space is available on your network. You can see the booking level of your digital network.&lt;br /&gt;
* When you Customize Current View for Reservations or Subcontracts, you can now select columns that show scheduled and actual (proof-of-play based) counts.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added new reports for digital networks.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now search for Reservations or Subcontracts based on actual (proof-of-play) counts, e.g. find ones that are over- or under-delivering.&lt;br /&gt;
* The currency symbol used when displaying money amounts is now a central setting in Ad Manager. (Before, the symbol displayed depended on an individual user's Windows Regional Settings, which could be wrong.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Player screen counts set in Content Manager are carried over into Ad Manager when Ad Manager ingests the player data.&lt;br /&gt;
* For video files, you can now specify a Start Time and End Time.&lt;br /&gt;
* Support for international text within Ad Manager. All user-interface elements can now store and display international text.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default list views for play lists, player play lists, and reservation play lists now include a column for the frame name.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default list views for media set reservations and subcontract media item reservations now include the player/output columns.&lt;br /&gt;
* Photos and other documents added through Document Management now automatically record the date the photo was taken.&lt;br /&gt;
* Added the Demographic Targeting features which allow the user to create custom data filters which can be assigned to players or faces. The scheduling engine does not use these properties as of yet.&lt;br /&gt;
* The sales person record now supports additional useful fields, including email address and phone numbers.&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Work Orders, Go to Task now works.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an error that would be displayed when trying to Contract Version details.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Save and New option did not work, so it has been removed from the menu and tool bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a crash when selecting Play this many in the Method section.&lt;br /&gt;
* On the subcontract dialogs, Display Counts are now correctly named Slot Counts.&lt;br /&gt;
* The Tools &amp;gt; Assign Slot Structure... menu-item was mislabeled as &amp;quot;Area&amp;quot;. This is now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where you could not delete a Slot from a Slot Structure when it was assigned a Subcontract.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a crash in Maps that could occur adding an area when using proximity mapping.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem in the Slot Structure Details page. If you created a new Slot and click in the Day Parts section without any frame and daypart data, it could crash. Now fixed.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem where trying to upload an invalid image as an attachment could lead to a crash.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a problem in the Find Leases dialog which resulted in an &amp;quot;invalid procedure call or argument&amp;quot; error when filtering on any of the Finalized, Exported, or Paid options.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an &amp;quot;Error 94 - invalid use of null&amp;quot; when opening the summary page of a static subcontract with no postings.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager</id>
		<title>Installing Ad Manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Installing_Ad_Manager"/>
				<updated>2018-07-25T20:00:31Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Installation and set up for SQL */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are installing Ad Manager for the first time, you may follow this set of steps.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Installation and set up for SQL===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
First, you will need to have a Microsoft SQL Server environment available.  As of March 2016, Ad Manager is certified up to all versions of SQL to 2014.  You may use SQL Express if you wish (please note that if using SQL Express there is a database size limit of 10GB for 2008 and 2012, 4GB for 2005 and 2GB for earlier versions. This is per database and is a limit imposed by Microsoft).  SQL needs to be configured for TCP/IP and named Pipes.  Please ensure backups are set up once the databases are in place.  For instructions on the steps to follow, go to [[How to set up SQL for Ad Manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you have been provided with an Ad Manager database (converted data or transferred file), add both the main database and the images database (suffixed by _bin) to SQL.  Assign user rights as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Install Ad Manager===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Download the newest version of the Ad Manager Client installer (AdMgr.msi) by contacting a Dot2Dot representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Place this Ad Manager installer in a location where you can access it on the machine(s) you wish to install it on. Ad Manager can be implemented in a terminal services environment if desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Install the new version of Ad Manager on each local machine by following the prompts.  If you do not have Scala Content Manager, leave the default as 10.x&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you have finished installing Ad Manager on each machine, you can use one of these machines to create your Ad Manager database in SQL.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click the Ad Manager icon. You may be asked to supply your serial number and license files.  If this is the case, please select the dongle (serial number) and license files provided as appropriate. Once you have a valid serial number and dongle on this machine, you will be asked to log in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Create/Select Database===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the appropriate user information. If you have an Ad Manager database installed on your SQL Server, enter its name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create the database the user logging into Ad Manager must have sysadmin rights under the server roles of that users security rights. If you set SQL up to accept Windows authentication and added the user you are logged in as, you may simply check the &amp;quot;Use Windows Authentication&amp;quot; check box.  If you are using SQL authentication, enter the username and password for a user you have set up in SQL.    &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Enter the Server name selected and enter a database name.  The Database name you enter will be what you want the system to create as your new database in SQL.  Ad Manager will notify you that you are creating a new database and will ask you some additional questions to help set up the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database is set up, Ad Manager will notify you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Set up Remaining Machines===&lt;br /&gt;
At this point, you will be able to access Ad Manager from any machine. Each user will need to supply the serial and license files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the database has been created all user accounts will have to be added to the database, Windows Authentication is considered the most secure security model. The users will not be able to access Ad Manager until their accounts have been created and a user mapping added to the Ad Manager database and _bin database.&lt;br /&gt;
If you have any questions or difficulties, please contact a Dot2Dot support representative.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Security===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a new user needs to be added to access Ad Manager, this can be done by [[Security_roles|adding the user in SQL]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Minimum_Specifications</id>
		<title>Ad Manager Minimum Specifications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Minimum_Specifications"/>
				<updated>2018-07-25T19:59:53Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Server */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''as of November 17, 2016'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''General Requirements''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* .Net 2.0 or later with latest Service Packs &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Server''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* 2.0 Ghz processor or higher &lt;br /&gt;
* Windows Server2003® or later &lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum of 4 GB RAM, recommend 8 GB. NOTE: dependent on the number of clients &lt;br /&gt;
connecting to Ad Manager and other applications or services &lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum 20 GB of available hard disk space. NOTE: dependent on size of database &lt;br /&gt;
and install &lt;br /&gt;
* SQL Server 2005 or newer with the latest service packs, up to SQL Server 2014 (Express version is fine for most installations).&lt;br /&gt;
* Ιnternet and email access for technical support&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Work Station''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* 2.0 GHz processor or higher &lt;br /&gt;
* Windows XP® or Windows 7® 32bit or Windows 7® 64bit &lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum of 2 GB RAM (predicated on operating system) &lt;br /&gt;
* 1 GB of available hard disk space. NOTE: dependent on size of install &lt;br /&gt;
* Internet and email access for technical support&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Minimum_Specifications</id>
		<title>Ad Manager Minimum Specifications</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Minimum_Specifications"/>
				<updated>2018-04-30T17:05:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;'''as of November 17, 2016'''&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''General Requirements''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* .Net 2.0 or later with latest Service Packs &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Server''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* 2.0 Ghz processor or higher &lt;br /&gt;
* Windows Server2003® or later &lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum of 4 GB RAM, recommend 8 GB. NOTE: dependent on the number of clients &lt;br /&gt;
connecting to Ad Manager and other applications or services &lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum 20 GB of available hard disk space. NOTE: dependent on size of database &lt;br /&gt;
and install &lt;br /&gt;
* SQL Server 2005 or newer with the latest service packs, up to SQL Server 2014.&lt;br /&gt;
* Ιnternet and email access for technical support&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== '''Work Station''' ==&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* 2.0 GHz processor or higher &lt;br /&gt;
* Windows XP® or Windows 7® 32bit or Windows 7® 64bit &lt;br /&gt;
* Minimum of 2 GB RAM (predicated on operating system) &lt;br /&gt;
* 1 GB of available hard disk space. NOTE: dependent on size of install &lt;br /&gt;
* Internet and email access for technical support&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Billposter_App_Company_Settings</id>
		<title>Billposter App Company Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Billposter_App_Company_Settings"/>
				<updated>2018-04-27T19:10:07Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: Created page with &amp;quot;Dot2Dot provides each company with a version of the Billposter App using your preferred settings.   The settings we can preset are:  - do you require a closeup photo (Yes/No) ...&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Dot2Dot provides each company with a version of the Billposter App using your preferred settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings we can preset are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- do you require a closeup photo (Yes/No)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- do you require an approach photo (Yes/No)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- do you want to enable syncing (Yes/No)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- what is the duration you want to sync (+/ 1 week, +/- 2 weeks, +/- 4 weeks)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- do you want to automatically sync? (Yes/No)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- if you want to automatically sync, how frequently would you like to do so (every 5, 10, 15 20, 30 or 60 minutes)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- what size image do you want uploaded to Ad Manager (original size, large, medium or small)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- do you want photos deleted from the device after they have been uploaded to Ad Manager (Yes/No)&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Setting_up_Billposter_App</id>
		<title>Setting up Billposter App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Setting_up_Billposter_App"/>
				<updated>2018-04-11T19:02:35Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Installing or Upgrading Billposter App */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Ad Manager Billposter app can be set up on an Android device using the instructions below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on how to set up users in Ad Manager that can log in, see [[Setting_up_Web_access| Setting Up Web Access]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on how to use the Billposter app, [[Using_Billposter_App|click here]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings that can be changed can be [[Billposter_App_Settings|found here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing or Upgrading Billposter App==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you are installing an upgrade to your existing version of the app, please do a sync to ensure the latest data has been transferred from the device to Ad Manager and then uninstall the old version first.'''  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are installing version 1.1 or later with company specific settings, remove any previous versions that may have been installed.  When updating from an older version the settings will not be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You will need to set up the [[How_to_Configure_a_Web_Ad_Manager_Server| Ad Manager Web Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
* You will need an Android device (Version 4.0 (Ice Cream Sandwich) or later for billposter app version 1.1.3 or earlier, or Version 4.4 (KitKat) for billposter app version 1.1.4 or later) with wi-fi capability and a camera&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to your Android device and access the home screen&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Apps, Find Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Settings, go to Security.&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Security turn off Unknown sources: allow installation of apps that may cause harm.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the Billposter app icon &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BillposterAppIcon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter an account name.  This is a descriptive name that you want to use for reference purposes. Then click Next. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AccountName.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the address of the Billposter App server. If you see an message at the bottom “Failed to connect to server”, check to make sure you have entered the information exactly as shown.  If you have, please contact your system administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServerName.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter your login credentials. enter the supplied user Id on the first line (User Id) and supplied password on the second line (password), exactly as written, as this is case sensitive and click Next. If you see a message “Failed to log you in”, make sure you have entered this information correctly. Click Next again. If you get a message stating &amp;quot;There are no billposters at this connection&amp;quot;, ensure you have [[Setting_up_Web_access|set up the web roles]] and [[Configuring_Billposter_App_in_Ad_Manager|configured Ad Manager to include billposter logins]]. If you continue to have issues, please contact your system administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LoginName.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* At this point, you will be shown a screen where you can select a billposter.  The first billposter on the list is shown by default. To change the billposter, click on the billposter name shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billposter1.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* From the list, select your name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BillposterSelection.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have selected your name, click Finish.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billposter2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point you can [[Billposter_App_Settings|modify the settings for the app on this device]].  When you go back to the app, you can start downloading your instruction lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You will see a blank screen.  In the top right corner is a refresh button.  This will load your posting tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sync.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Refresh, wait for the sync to complete and you should see posting tasks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note: If a firewall is in place, make sure to open ports 80 and 8080'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Setting_up_Billposter_App</id>
		<title>Setting up Billposter App</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Setting_up_Billposter_App"/>
				<updated>2018-04-11T18:57:29Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Installing or Upgrading Billposter App */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Ad Manager Billposter app can be set up on an Android device using the instructions below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on how to set up users in Ad Manager that can log in, see [[Setting_up_Web_access| Setting Up Web Access]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For instructions on how to use the Billposter app, [[Using_Billposter_App|click here]].  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The settings that can be changed can be [[Billposter_App_Settings|found here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Installing or Upgrading Billposter App==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''If you are installing an upgrade to your existing version of the app, please do a sync to ensure the latest data has been transferred from the device to Ad Manager and then uninstall the old version first.'''  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are installing version 1.1 or later with company specific settings, remove any previous versions that may have been installed.  When updating from an older version the settings will not be affected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You will need to set up the [[How_to_Configure_a_Web_Ad_Manager_Server| Ad Manager Web Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
* You will need an Android device (Version 4.0 (Ice Cream Sandwich) or later for version 1.1.3 or earlier, or Version 4.4 (KitKat) for version 1.1.4 or later) with wi-fi capability and a camera&lt;br /&gt;
* Go to your Android device and access the home screen&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Apps, Find Settings&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Settings, go to Security.&lt;br /&gt;
* Under Security turn off Unknown sources: allow installation of apps that may cause harm.&lt;br /&gt;
* Click on the Billposter app icon &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BillposterAppIcon.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter an account name.  This is a descriptive name that you want to use for reference purposes. Then click Next. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:AccountName.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the address of the Billposter App server. If you see an message at the bottom “Failed to connect to server”, check to make sure you have entered the information exactly as shown.  If you have, please contact your system administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ServerName.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter your login credentials. enter the supplied user Id on the first line (User Id) and supplied password on the second line (password), exactly as written, as this is case sensitive and click Next. If you see a message “Failed to log you in”, make sure you have entered this information correctly. Click Next again. If you get a message stating &amp;quot;There are no billposters at this connection&amp;quot;, ensure you have [[Setting_up_Web_access|set up the web roles]] and [[Configuring_Billposter_App_in_Ad_Manager|configured Ad Manager to include billposter logins]]. If you continue to have issues, please contact your system administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LoginName.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* At this point, you will be shown a screen where you can select a billposter.  The first billposter on the list is shown by default. To change the billposter, click on the billposter name shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billposter1.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* From the list, select your name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:BillposterSelection.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Once you have selected your name, click Finish.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Billposter2.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this point you can [[Billposter_App_Settings|modify the settings for the app on this device]].  When you go back to the app, you can start downloading your instruction lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You will see a blank screen.  In the top right corner is a refresh button.  This will load your posting tasks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Sync.png|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Refresh, wait for the sync to complete and you should see posting tasks&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Note: If a firewall is in place, make sure to open ports 80 and 8080'''&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Billposter_App_Release_Notes</id>
		<title>Billposter App Release Notes</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Billposter_App_Release_Notes"/>
				<updated>2018-03-19T11:06:43Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Version 1.1.3 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enhanced the logging capabilities of the app.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.1.2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The posting's POP photos are no longer replaced when the bill-poster completes a take-down task.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.1.1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where location and design images were downloaded repeatedly even if they were already on the phone.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.1.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed issues with displaying location and design images on Android 7.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed potential issues with taking photos on Android 7.0 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
* The location and design images are now hidden from the device's picture gallery and will be removed if the app is uninstalled.&lt;br /&gt;
* On Android 6.0 and later the app will now request permission to access the device's photos and location at run time.&lt;br /&gt;
* The default settings can now be client-specific.&lt;br /&gt;
* The map displayed when clicking on a location's address now shows all the locations for that day.&lt;br /&gt;
* Requires Ad Manager 5.7.4 or later.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.0.6 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Optimized the publishing of task completions: the uploading of photos now starts only after all task completions are published and photos will not be uploaded more than once.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.0.5 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the completion photos of re-posting tasks would not show up in Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.0.4 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now see the face size in the posting task details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.0.3 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a synchronization issue where the app would retry excessively upon an HTTP request timeout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.0.2 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed a synchronization issue where an HTTP request timeout would cause the app to drop the current authentication token, leading to a vicious cycle of new session requests, increased server load and more timeouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.0.1 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* In account settings you can now choose to reduce the image upload size in order to reduce the app's data usage.&lt;br /&gt;
* Fixed an issue where the app wasn't displaying and sorting by the posting route number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Version 1.0.0 ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The source plant bin is now displayed with the posting task&lt;br /&gt;
* If the task has been identified as requiring the previous creative to be returned to plant, the plant will be identified with the previous posted information.&lt;br /&gt;
* You can now browse posting tasks by swiping left and right in the detail view.&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings - You can not enable or disable the synchronization of posting tasks, along with the duration of data to synch.&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings - You can choose to have the Billposter App automatically synch with Ad Manager at a specified interval.&lt;br /&gt;
* Settings - You can choose to delete photos after they have been uploaded&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Sharing_a_Proposal_Online</id>
		<title>Sharing a Proposal Online</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Sharing_a_Proposal_Online"/>
				<updated>2018-03-12T11:22:13Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you wish to share a Proposal using Ad Manager's online tools, please ensure you have the [http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/How_to_Configure_a_Web_Ad_Manager_Server| Web Ad Manager server set up] and the appropriate Ad Manager license.  Once you do, go to the Contract or Subcontract you wish to share.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, click on the '''Share Online''' button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShareonlineLocList.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the Proposal tab and click Share.  This will provide you with a link. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to test this link, click on the &amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;quot; button to the right of the link. This will allow you to see what will be provided to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can copy this link using the Copy Link button and paste it into an email for sending to the client.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Unsharing a link==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to stop allowing people with this link to see the information about this Subcontract or Contract, go to the Share Online button for the Contract/Subcontract as un-check Share Link.  Ad Manager will confirm that you no longer wish to share access to this Proposal.  Click &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; to stop sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Issues==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are having issues seeing the information, but know the link is working for another person, please [[Clear_Browser_Cache|clear the browser cache]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:ShareonlineLocList.JPG</id>
		<title>File:ShareonlineLocList.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:ShareonlineLocList.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-03-12T11:21:52Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Sharing_POP_Online</id>
		<title>Sharing POP Online</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Sharing_POP_Online"/>
				<updated>2018-03-12T11:21:34Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you wish to share POP using Ad Manager's online tools, please ensure you have the [[How_to_Configure_a_Web_Ad_Manager_Server| Web Ad Manager server set up]] and the appropriate Ad Manager license.  Once you do, go to the Contract or Subcontract you wish to share.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From here, click on the '''Share Online''' button.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ShareonlinePOP.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Select the POP tab and click Share.  This will provide you with a link. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to test this link, click on the &amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;gt;&amp;quot; button to the right of the link. This will allow you to see what will be provided to the client.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can copy this link using the Copy Link button and paste it into an email for sending to the client.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Unsharing a link==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to stop allowing people with this link to see the information about this Subcontract or Contract, go to the Share Online button for the Contract/Subcontract as un-check Share Link.  Ad Manager will confirm that you no longer wish to share access to this POP.  Click &amp;quot;Yes&amp;quot; to stop sharing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Issues==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are having issues seeing the information, but know the link is working for another person, please [[Clear_Browser_Cache|clear the browser cache]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:ShareonlinePOP.JPG</id>
		<title>File:ShareonlinePOP.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:ShareonlinePOP.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-03-12T11:20:40Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Billposter_App_Settings</id>
		<title>Billposter App Settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Billposter_App_Settings"/>
				<updated>2018-03-11T19:11:33Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The settings that are used with the app can be modified at any time.  Certain settings are related to how the billposter app functions, and other settings provide you with the ability to set app permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==App Usage Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users have the ability of setting defaults for the app.  Go to Settings - Applications - Billposter App or click the menu key while in the app and choose settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click on the account you wish to update.  From here you can disable or enable the sync,enable a periodic sync and adjust its frequency and configure the app to delete the photos after they have been uploaded (under account settings);&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After clicking on General Settings, users can select from the following options.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Settings.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Enable Sync''' - Users can choose whether to turn on or off the synchronization between the device and Ad Manager&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Duration to Sync''' - The device will retrieve all outstanding posting tasks within the time frame specified.  Any photos related to these tasks will also be loaded onto the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Sync periodically''' - This allows users to be able to have the device automatically sync with Ad Manager.  If this selection is made, the user can specify the frequency via the '''Sync every''' option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Image upload size''' - This allows you to be able to select the size of the image to be uploaded to Ad Manager.  Small will send images where the larger dimension is 1024 pixels, Medium will send images where the larger dimension is 1600 pixels and Large will send images where the larger dimension is 2400 pixels.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Imagesize.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
'''Delete uploaded photos''' - Once a POP photo has been uploaded to Ad Manager, you can choose whether the app will delete the POP photo from the device.  Please note that images related to posting tasks will not be removed from the device until the posting task is removed from the device.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==App Permission Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Additional settings for the app, including whether the app has access to the photo library can be found by going to the Android device's settings and go Settings--&amp;gt;Apps--&amp;gt;Billposter--&amp;gt;Permissions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:App Permissions.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:App_Permissions.png</id>
		<title>File:App Permissions.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:App_Permissions.png"/>
				<updated>2018-03-11T19:07:08Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Media_(Digital_2)</id>
		<title>Media (Digital 2)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Media_(Digital_2)"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:37:12Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Media Items */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Media is the term used to identify the advertising assets that play on Digital Players.  They are identified in Ad Manager's Digital 2 module as either a single Media Item or a Media Set of multiple Media Items.  They are added to scheduled Reservations and published to the Players along with scheduling criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Items can be viewed in a number of ways:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.  From a Finder of All Media Items  - this will display a list of all Media Items currently in the Ad Manager database that meet the search criteria entered in the Finder. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Media Items Finder.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.  From the Media Items page of a Contract  - this will display a list of all Media Items for the entire Contract that have been associated with its Reservations.  &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Contract Media Item.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  From the Media Items page of a Subcontract (Digital) -  this will display a list of all Media Items for that particular Subcontract (Digital) that have been associated with its Reservations.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Subcontract Media Item.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.  From the Media Items page of a Reservation. - this will display those Media Items that are associated with that particular Reservation. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reservation Media Items.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information about a particular Media Item,  double-click the selected Media Item in a list; right-click while on the selected Media Item in the list and choose Properties; or click the Properties button (when available on a Page) when a Media Item is selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Details Page of a Media Item displays some default information about the Item that is contained in Content Manager as well as fields to associate it with an Advertiser as well as a Brand.  As well, users can also see a thumbnail of the Media Item, if available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Media Item.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Content Manager - This field itentifies the Content Manager that contains the Media Item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Length - This field identifies the length of the media item in Content Manager.  NOTE:  If the Media Item is a static image there will be no time associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name in Content Manager - This field identifies the name that the Media Item has been given when uploaded to Content Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name* - This is the Ad Manager name for the Media Item.  Note that when Media Items are imported from Content Manager they are given the same same.  Users can modify this name if required.  However,  it is strongly recommended that users name the Media Item the same in Ad Manager and Content Manager for ease of identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description - This field can be used to further describe the Media Item.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advertiser - This field associates the Media Item with a particular Advertiser.  Select from the pick list or add a new one as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brand - This field associates the Media Item with a particular Brand of the Advertiser.  Select from the pick list or add a new one as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valid From - This date from Content Manager identifies the earliest date this media item can play, whether it is scheduled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valid To - This date from Content Manager identifies the latest date this media item can play, whether it is scheduled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Approvals ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Approvals Page of a Media Item displays a list all [[Landlords|Landlord]] Approvals that have been entered into the data for this Media Item.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Approvals.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fuctions available through the buttons immediately above the  pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]] - To add a new Landlord Approval, select the New button.   In the following screen select the Landlord name from the pick list  and save the record.  Note that users cannot add nor edit the Media Item field nor Approved on field.  These are system generated fields. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]] - To remove a Landlord Approval, select it in the list and click the delete button. Ad Manager will ask for confirmation of the deletion.  Click &amp;lt;Yes&amp;gt; to remove the Approval or click &amp;lt;No&amp;gt; to cancel the deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To modify the Landlord information for a particular Approval, select it in the list and click the Edit button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Edit function.  Note that only the Landlord name can be modified by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Landlord Approvals, in order to see a subset list, click the  Filter checkbox at the top of the pane. &lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Approval(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt;.  Ad Manager will display those Approvals that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Media Sets ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Sets Page displays a list of all Media Sets that contain this particular Media Item.&lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Media Set.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot create nor delete Media Sets from this Page,  However, information about a Media Set can be viewed and modified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To view and/or modify the information for a particular Media Set, select it in the list and click the Properties button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Edit function. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Media Sets, in order to see a subset list, click the  Filter checkbox at the top of the pane.  (need filter screen shot).&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Media Set(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt;.  Ad Manager will display those Media Sets that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Playback Counts ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Item Playback Counts Page displays information as to how many times this particular Media Item played on the Players to which it was scheduled. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback Counts.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page provides details about the Dates it played, Times played per Screen, Number of Screens, etc.  &lt;br /&gt;
As with any list, the view can be customized to add/remove columns of data and the list can be ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add nor modify an item on this page as it is populated from the connection to Content Manager.  However, users may delete any item(s) from this list as desired.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]  -To delete the item(s), select in the list and click the delete button in the top right of the pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Playback counts to see a subset list, click the Filter checkbox at the top of the screen.  &lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Playback Count(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; .  Ad Manager will display those Playback Counts that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
To enter filter criteria based on Reservation and/or Media Item criteria, click the appropriate box and enter the criteria as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Playback Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Item Playback Summary Page displays a summary of the Playback Counts to date for this particular Reservation.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Playback Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add, delete nor modify the information displayed on this page.  It is populated by information received from the connection to Content Manager and calculations are applied by Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Required Approvals ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Required Approvals Page of a Media Item displays a list of Landlord Approvals required and their Due by and Approved on Dates. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add nor delete any Approval that is displayed on the page.  However, the Approval can be modified as to whether it happened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]  - To edit an Approval, select it and click the Edit button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item to open the Edit function.  (need screen shot)  Check the box beside &amp;quot;Approved&amp;quot; as appropriate.  NOTE:  Ad Manager automatically sets the approval date as the date that the box has been checked.  As well, the Due by date is populated as the first start date of the Reservation to which the Media Item has been scheduled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reservations ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Reservations Page of a Media Item displays all Reservations to which the Item has been scheduled either individually or as part of a Media Set. &lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add nor delete Reservations that are displayed on the page.  However, a Reservation can be viewed and modified, if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To view and/or modify the information about a particular Reservation, select it in the list and click the Properties button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Reservation for editing or viewing purposes. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Reservations in order to see a subset list, click the Filter checkbox at the top of the pane.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Reservationl(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; (need screen shot).  Ad Manager will display those Reservations that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Segments (Filler) ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Segments (Filler) Page of  a Media Item displays those Loop Segments on which the Media Item has been added as Filler for padding of the Segment. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot and nor delete any Segment that is displayed on the page.  However, the Segment can be viewed and modified, if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To view and/or modify the information about a particular Segment, select it in the list and click the Properties button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Segment for editing or viewing purposes.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Segments in order to see a subset list, click the Filter checkbox at the top of the pane.  (need filter screen shot).&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Segment(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; .  Ad Manager will display those Segments that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right Click ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Media Items will display this menu. (Need screen shot) From here users can do such activities as create Media Sets, record approvals, republish the Media Items to Content Manager, and alter the Advertiser/Brand information as well as information from Content Manager using the Update option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update tool is used to modify one or more properties for the selected Media Item(s).  (Need screen shot) NOTE:  When using this tool it is important that the data being updated is common to ALL selected Media Items.  &lt;br /&gt;
Click the checkbox beside the data to be updated, enter the new details and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt;.  To update Content Manager information such as the Thumbnail and length of the Media Item(s), click the checkbox beside the data to be updated,  Ad Manager will update the field(s) on all selected Media Items.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create Media Set - To create a Media Set of Media Items, select in the list and choose Create Media Set.  Ad Manager will add these Media Items to a new Media Set and display the ones selected in the Items pane of that Media Set. (need screen shot).  For further information on Media Sets, click here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record Approval - To record Landlord Approvals on the Media Item(s), select in the list and choose Record Approval. (need screen shot)  Select the Landlord name from the list and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt;  Ad Mananger will update the Approvals Page of the selected Media Item(s) with the Landlord information as well as today's date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Republish - This tool is used to republish previously published Media Items(s).  Select the Media Items(s) to be republished, right click and choose Republish from the list.  Ad Manager will mark the selected Media Item(s) to be republished to Content Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows users to open and view details of the related object that was selected from the &amp;quot;Go To&amp;quot; list.  (need screen shot) Note that this feature can only be used with single Media Items.  If more than one Media Item is selected, the feature is not available to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media Sets ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Sets are a collection of Media Items, which can contain images, video and scripts or combinations of the same.  They can be viewed in a number of ways:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.  From a Finder of All Media Sets  - this will display a list of all Media Sets currently in the Ad Manager database that meet    the search criteria entered in the Finder.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.  From the Ads page of a Reservation. - this will display those Media Sets that are associated with that particular Reservation.  (need screen shot)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  From the Media Sets page of a Media Item - this will display those Media Sets to which the Media Item belongs. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can be created in a number of ways:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.  By using the Create Media Set Tool when on a list of selected Media Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.  By right clicking and choosing &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; when on a list of All Media Sets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  By clicking the File Menu item&amp;gt;New&amp;gt;Other&amp;gt;Media Set  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information about a particular Media Set,  double-click the selected Media Set in a list; right-click while on the selected Media Set in the list and choose Properties; or click the Properties button (when available on a Page) when a Media Set is selected. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Details Page of a Media Set contains such information as the Name of the Set, the Advertiser associated with the Set and the Media Items contained in the Set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name - Enter the name for this particular Media Set in this field. Note that is a required field and Ad Manager will not allow the Media Set to be saved without something entered here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description - This is a further description of the Media Set for ease of identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advertiser - Select the Advertiser for the Media Set from the dropdown list.  If the name is not present in the list, users can create a new Advertiser as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brand - Select the particular Brand for the Media Set from the dropdown list.  If the name of the Brand is not present in the list, users can create a new one as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items -   The Items pane displays all Media Items that are part of this Media Set as well as details about their length, and scheduling information.  These can be images, videos and/or scala script files.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Playback_Summary.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Playback Summary.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Playback_Summary.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:35:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Playback_Counts.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Playback Counts.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Playback_Counts.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:34:42Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Media_Set.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Media Set.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Media_Set.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:32:54Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Approvals.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Approvals.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Approvals.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:31:24Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Reservation_Media_Items.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Reservation Media Items.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Reservation_Media_Items.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:30:04Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Subcontract_Media_Item.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Subcontract Media Item.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Subcontract_Media_Item.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:29:30Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Contract_Media_Item.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Contract Media Item.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Contract_Media_Item.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:29:00Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Media_Items_Finder.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Media Items Finder.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Media_Items_Finder.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:28:27Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Media_(Digital_2)</id>
		<title>Media (Digital 2)</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Media_(Digital_2)"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:24:37Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Details */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Media is the term used to identify the advertising assets that play on Digital Players.  They are identified in Ad Manager's Digital 2 module as either a single Media Item or a Media Set of multiple Media Items.  They are added to scheduled Reservations and published to the Players along with scheduling criteria.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
Media Items can be viewed in a number of ways:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.  From a Finder of All Media Items  - this will display a list of all Media Items currently in the Ad Manager database that meet the search criteria entered in the Finder.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.  From the Media Items page of a Contract  - this will display a list of all Media Items for the entire Contract that have been associated with its Reservations.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  From the Media Items page of a Subcontract (Digital) -  this will display a list of all Media Items for that particular Subcontract (Digital) that have been associated with its Reservations.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.  From the Media Items page of a Reservation. - this will display those Media Items that are associated with that particular Reservation.  (need screen shot)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information about a particular Media Item,  double-click the selected Media Item in a list; right-click while on the selected Media Item in the list and choose Properties; or click the Properties button (when available on a Page) when a Media Item is selected. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Details Page of a Media Item displays some default information about the Item that is contained in Content Manager as well as fields to associate it with an Advertiser as well as a Brand.  As well, users can also see a thumbnail of the Media Item, if available. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Media Item.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Content Manager - This field itentifies the Content Manager that contains the Media Item&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Length - This field identifies the length of the media item in Content Manager.  NOTE:  If the Media Item is a static image there will be no time associated with it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name in Content Manager - This field identifies the name that the Media Item has been given when uploaded to Content Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name* - This is the Ad Manager name for the Media Item.  Note that when Media Items are imported from Content Manager they are given the same same.  Users can modify this name if required.  However,  it is strongly recommended that users name the Media Item the same in Ad Manager and Content Manager for ease of identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description - This field can be used to further describe the Media Item.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advertiser - This field associates the Media Item with a particular Advertiser.  Select from the pick list or add a new one as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brand - This field associates the Media Item with a particular Brand of the Advertiser.  Select from the pick list or add a new one as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valid From - This date from Content Manager identifies the earliest date this media item can play, whether it is scheduled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Valid To - This date from Content Manager identifies the latest date this media item can play, whether it is scheduled or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Approvals ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Approvals Page of a Media Item displays a list all [[Landlords|Landlord]] Approvals that have been entered into the data for this Media Item.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The fuctions available through the buttons immediately above the  pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]] - To add a new Landlord Approval, select the New button.   In the following screen select the Landlord name from the pick list  and save the record.  Note that users cannot add nor edit the Media Item field nor Approved on field.  These are system generated fields.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]] - To remove a Landlord Approval, select it in the list and click the delete button. Ad Manager will ask for confirmation of the deletion.  Click &amp;lt;Yes&amp;gt; to remove the Approval or click &amp;lt;No&amp;gt; to cancel the deletion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To modify the Landlord information for a particular Approval, select it in the list and click the Edit button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Edit function.  Note that only the Landlord name can be modified by the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Landlord Approvals, in order to see a subset list, click the  Filter checkbox at the top of the pane.  (need filter screen shot).&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Approval(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; (need screen shot).  Ad Manager will display those Approvals that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Media Sets ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Sets Page displays a list of all Media Sets that contain this particular Media Item.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot create nor delete Media Sets from this Page,  However, information about a Media Set can be viewed and modified.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To view and/or modify the information for a particular Media Set, select it in the list and click the Properties button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Edit function.   (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Media Sets, in order to see a subset list, click the  Filter checkbox at the top of the pane.  (need filter screen shot).&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Media Set(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; (need screen shot).  Ad Manager will display those Media Sets that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Playback Counts ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Item Playback Counts Page displays information as to how many times this particular Media Item played on the Players to which it was scheduled. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The page provides details about the Dates it played, Times played per Screen, Number of Screens, etc.  &lt;br /&gt;
As with any list, the view can be customized to add/remove columns of data and the list can be ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add nor modify an item on this page as it is populated from the connection to Content Manager.  However, users may delete any item(s) from this list as desired.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]  -To delete the item(s), select in the list and click the delete button in the top right of the pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Playback counts to see a subset list, click the Filter checkbox at the top of the screen.  (need Filter screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Playback Count(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; (need screen shot).  Ad Manager will display those Playback Counts that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
To enter filter criteria based on Reservation and/or Media Item criteria, click the appropriate box and enter the criteria as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Playback Summary ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Media Item Playback Summary Page displays a summary of the Playback Counts to date for this particular Reservation.&lt;br /&gt;
(need screen shot) &lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add, delete nor modify the information displayed on this page.  It is populated by information received from the connection to Content Manager and calculations are applied by Ad Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Required Approvals ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Required Approvals Page of a Media Item displays a list of Landlord Approvals required and their Due by and Approved on Dates. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add nor delete any Approval that is displayed on the page.  However, the Approval can be modified as to whether it happened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]  - To edit an Approval, select it and click the Edit button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item to open the Edit function.  (need screen shot)  Check the box beside &amp;quot;Approved&amp;quot; as appropriate.  NOTE:  Ad Manager automatically sets the approval date as the date that the box has been checked.  As well, the Due by date is populated as the first start date of the Reservation to which the Media Item has been scheduled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reservations ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Reservations Page of a Media Item displays all Reservations to which the Item has been scheduled either individually or as part of a Media Set. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot add nor delete Reservations that are displayed on the page.  However, a Reservation can be viewed and modified, if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To view and/or modify the information about a particular Reservation, select it in the list and click the Properties button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Reservation for editing or viewing purposes.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Reservations in order to see a subset list, click the Filter checkbox at the top of the pane.  (need filter screen shot).&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Reservationl(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; (need screen shot).  Ad Manager will display those Reservations that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Segments (Filler) ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Segments (Filler) Page of  a Media Item displays those Loop Segments on which the Media Item has been added as Filler for padding of the Segment. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
As with other lists in Ad Manager, the view can be customized and ordered as desired.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users cannot and nor delete any Segment that is displayed on the page.  However, the Segment can be viewed and modified, if required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]] - To view and/or modify the information about a particular Segment, select it in the list and click the Properties button.  Alternatively, users can double click the item in the list to open the Segment for editing or viewing purposes.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To filter the list of Segments in order to see a subset list, click the Filter checkbox at the top of the pane.  (need filter screen shot).&lt;br /&gt;
In the following window enter the criteria for the desired Segment(s), and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; (need screen shot).  Ad Manager will display those Segments that match the criteria entered.&lt;br /&gt;
When the Filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box.  To clear the filter and see all records, click in the checkbox, and in the following window click &amp;lt;Clear&amp;gt;, followed by the &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Right Click ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Media Items will display this menu. (Need screen shot) From here users can do such activities as create Media Sets, record approvals, republish the Media Items to Content Manager, and alter the Advertiser/Brand information as well as information from Content Manager using the Update option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update tool is used to modify one or more properties for the selected Media Item(s).  (Need screen shot) NOTE:  When using this tool it is important that the data being updated is common to ALL selected Media Items.  &lt;br /&gt;
Click the checkbox beside the data to be updated, enter the new details and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt;.  To update Content Manager information such as the Thumbnail and length of the Media Item(s), click the checkbox beside the data to be updated,  Ad Manager will update the field(s) on all selected Media Items.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create Media Set - To create a Media Set of Media Items, select in the list and choose Create Media Set.  Ad Manager will add these Media Items to a new Media Set and display the ones selected in the Items pane of that Media Set. (need screen shot).  For further information on Media Sets, click here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Record Approval - To record Landlord Approvals on the Media Item(s), select in the list and choose Record Approval. (need screen shot)  Select the Landlord name from the list and click &amp;lt;OK&amp;gt;  Ad Mananger will update the Approvals Page of the selected Media Item(s) with the Landlord information as well as today's date and time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Republish - This tool is used to republish previously published Media Items(s).  Select the Media Items(s) to be republished, right click and choose Republish from the list.  Ad Manager will mark the selected Media Item(s) to be republished to Content Manager.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows users to open and view details of the related object that was selected from the &amp;quot;Go To&amp;quot; list.  (need screen shot) Note that this feature can only be used with single Media Items.  If more than one Media Item is selected, the feature is not available to the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Media Sets ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Media Sets are a collection of Media Items, which can contain images, video and scripts or combinations of the same.  They can be viewed in a number of ways:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.  From a Finder of All Media Sets  - this will display a list of all Media Sets currently in the Ad Manager database that meet    the search criteria entered in the Finder.  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.  From the Ads page of a Reservation. - this will display those Media Sets that are associated with that particular Reservation.  (need screen shot)  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  From the Media Sets page of a Media Item - this will display those Media Sets to which the Media Item belongs. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can be created in a number of ways:-&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.  By using the Create Media Set Tool when on a list of selected Media Items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.  By right clicking and choosing &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; when on a list of All Media Sets.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.  By clicking the File Menu item&amp;gt;New&amp;gt;Other&amp;gt;Media Set  (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To view the information about a particular Media Set,  double-click the selected Media Set in a list; right-click while on the selected Media Set in the list and choose Properties; or click the Properties button (when available on a Page) when a Media Set is selected. (need screen shot)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Details ===&lt;br /&gt;
The Details Page of a Media Set contains such information as the Name of the Set, the Advertiser associated with the Set and the Media Items contained in the Set.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Name - Enter the name for this particular Media Set in this field. Note that is a required field and Ad Manager will not allow the Media Set to be saved without something entered here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Description - This is a further description of the Media Set for ease of identification.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advertiser - Select the Advertiser for the Media Set from the dropdown list.  If the name is not present in the list, users can create a new Advertiser as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Brand - Select the particular Brand for the Media Set from the dropdown list.  If the name of the Brand is not present in the list, users can create a new one as required.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items -   The Items pane displays all Media Items that are part of this Media Set as well as details about their length, and scheduling information.  These can be images, videos and/or scala script files.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Media_Item.JPG</id>
		<title>File:Media Item.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:Media_Item.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:24:18Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Leases</id>
		<title>Leases</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Leases"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:12:17Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Fields */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Ad Manager maintains a database of all leases that structures are assigned to. The lease information is used in a number of areas of the software. Additional information can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Ad Manager you can track all types of information pertaining to a Lease; from the Lease number, to the terms, to which Sites/Faces are attached to it. With accurate and up-to-the minute data entry, you can have the entire history of the Lease; and, with the use of some saved Finders, you can work with your Leases in a timely organized manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter Payment Schedules and track Payments in addition to the standard leasing functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a New Lease ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on a Site Window and want to enter Lease information, you can either enter the new lease number in the Lease Number field on the Site Details page and hit the Tab key on your keyboard, or you can go click on the arrow beside the New icon ([[File:New_add_button.JPG]]) for a list of items you can add. Select OTHER, and then select Lease. The Lease - Details Window will appear, and a new Lease can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Lease into Ad Manager from the main Ad Manager Window, click the File - New - Other menu item and select Lease. The new Lease window will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_New_Lease.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this screen, basic information about the Lease can be entered on the Details Page. This information includes the Lease Number, any description you may wish to give for the Lease, type, the start and end dates of the Lease, and any renewal information you may wish to enter. Usually the renewal information will be dependent upon how you wish to track your Leases and when to address renewals. NOTE: Information you put on this page does not affect your Lease Payment Schedule(s). If you make changes to the dates, you will still have to edit the Payments, as necessary, to reflect these changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Lessors Page you can add Lessor information. To add a new Lessor, click the New ([[File:New_add_button.JPG]]) button to the right and you can either select an existing name or create a new one by choosing &amp;lt;New&amp;gt;. If you choose &amp;lt;New&amp;gt; the following window will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_New_Lessor.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the necessary data such as name, phone numbers, address, etc. NOTE: Vendor Code is a required field and must be filled in. You may also want to complete the Tax Id box if you are providing your Lessor with Government income statements. Perhaps you may wish to add a contact name if the Lessor is a Company rather than a person. To add the Contact person, click the Contacts Page, click the New button, either choose a name already existing from the list or choose &amp;lt;New&amp;gt; to add a new one and enter the detail. NOTE: You can have as many Lessors on a Lease as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Contacts Page, any contact people that are related to this Lease can be added. To add a Contact person, click on the New (  ) button on the page. From here you can select a Contact from the list, or add one by clicking on &amp;lt;New...&amp;gt; at the top of the list. Once you have finished adding Contacts to the Lease, click on the Save button to save the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lessor_Contacts.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modifying a Lease ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To modify a Lease, simply click the database from the OTHER folder, then double click the desired item and make the change(s) necessary. Once you have finished, click the Save ([[File:New_save_button.JPG]]) button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== Deleting a Lease ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a Lease, there must be no sites associated with it. Select the database from the OTHER folder, then double click the desired item. Select the Delete button ([[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]) for the record. Ad Manager will ask you for confirmation to delete the lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lease Pages==&lt;br /&gt;
==== Attachments Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the Attachments page, [[Attachments|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contacts Page====&lt;br /&gt;
The Contacts Page is used to enter information referring to all Contact people for a Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Contacts.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Contacts Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Contacts on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Contacts, in the event changes to the number of Contacts has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Contacts that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Contact to the Lease. Click on this button and either select an existing Name from the list or create a new record by choosing &amp;lt; New &amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Contact from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Contacts to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Contacts with a certain Name, Phone number, or Address. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Details Page====&lt;br /&gt;
The Details Page is where information about the Lease agreement is displayed. Information on the terms of the Lease, and whether the Lease can be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Details.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the appropriate information for each field. Select the appropriate item from any of the drop down lists (in the [[File:New_dropdown_button.JPG]] boxes) or type in the information if it is not present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fields =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Description'': This is a quick description of what this Lease pertains to. This description allows the users to be able to recognize the Lease among a long list of Leases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Duration'': This is the date range for the Lease. You can enter the date or select the date from the dropdown calendar, and enter in the duration or the end date. Ad Manager will automatically calculate the third value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Expires On'': The date when the Lease will expire. If you are extending the lease automatically, this date should always reflect the newest expiry date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Extend Automatically'': This check box should be checked if you lease agreement allows you to automatically extend the it without signing a new Lease agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Extend Expiry To'': If your Lease agreement allows for the automatic extension of the Lease, the expiry date of the extension should be entered here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Number'': This is the unique Lease number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Renew On'': This is an arbitrary date, chosen to flag your Leasing department that its time to go out and renew the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Type'': This is where you can specify what type of lease this is (percentage, flat rate, step/escalator, etc). The default value for a lease is &amp;lt;Unspecified&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Faces Page====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Faces Page lists all Faces that have been attached to the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Faces.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Faces Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Faces on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Faces, in the event changes to the number of Faces has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to highlight multiple Faces and apply the same properties to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Faces that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Face from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Faces to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Faces of a certain media type, facing a particular direction, of a particular size, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Faces will display this menu. From here you can move the selected Face to a different Site, chart/schedule the Face to a Subcontract, or Update a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Face(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Faces_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Faces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move To Site - The Move To Site menu item allows you to move highlighted Faces from this Site to another Site in the inventory. A filter will appear to assist you in selecting the appropriate Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign To Subcontract - The Assign To Subcontract menu item allows you to highlight a Face and assign it directly to a Subcontract. A filter will appear to assist you in selecting the appropriate Subcontract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Face Conflicts - The Face Conflicts menu item allows you to view all conflicts that exist for the highlighted Face . You can specify what conditions are considered to be a Conflict prior to clicking OK. The subsequent list is all scheduling that has generated a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Lessors Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Lessors Page is used to enter Lessor/Payee information for a Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Lessors.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Lessors Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Lessors on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Lessors, in the event changes to the number of Lessors has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Lessors that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Lessor to the Lease. Click on this button and either select an existing Name from the list or create a new record by choosing &amp;lt; New &amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Lessor from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Lessor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Lessors to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Lessors with a certain Name, Vendor Code, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Locations Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Locations Page lists all Digital (2) Locations that are associated with this Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the Notes page, [[Notes page|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payment Schedules ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Payment Schedules Page provides a financial history for this Lease by showing a listing of all payment schedules that have been set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payment_Schedules.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons found at the top of the Lease - Details screen when you are on the Payment Schedules Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the Payment Schedules in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Payment Schedules, in the event changes to the Payment Schedules have occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to select one or more Payment Schedules and change information on them. All highlighted Schedules will be changed to reflect the items selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Payment Schedules pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Payment Schedule for this Lease. The New Lease Payment Schedule - Details window will open where you can create a new Lease Payment Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Payment Schedule from this Lease. Highlight the item and click the Delete button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Opens the Lease Payment Schedule - Details window to allow you to review or change any information related to the Lease Payment.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Payment Schedules will display this menu. From here you can duplicate the Payment Schedule, change the status of a Payment Schedule as well as any line items by using the Update option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payment_Schedules_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Payment Schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duplicate - The Duplicate menu item allows you to create a new Payment Schedule with the same Line item configuration as the current Payment Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Payment Schedules to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Payment Schedules with certain recurrence patterns, for specific Payees, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the Filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payment Summary Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Payment Summary Page allows you to identify how well you have reached your Payment requirements. From this screen you can see how much money has been Paid, Finalized, Exported, Sent, and the Current Balance Owing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payment_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payments Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Payments Page provides a listing of all payments that have been scheduled to be payed for this Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payments.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons found at the top of the Lease - Details screen when you are on the Payments Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the Payments in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Payments, in the event changes to the Payments have occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to select one or more Payments and change information on them. All highlighted Payments will be changed to reflect the items selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Payments pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Create a new Lease Payment Schedule for this Lease. The New Lease Payment Schedule - Details window will open where you can create a new Lease Payment Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Payment from this Lease. Highlight the item and click the Delete button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Opens the Payment - Details window to allow you to review or change any information related to the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Payments will display this menu. From here you can change the due date of a payment, the status of a payment as well as any line items by using the Update option, as well as, finalize, un-finalize, and reset the exported status of a payment or group of highlighted payments.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payments_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Payments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finalize - Finalizing a Payment will prevent you from making additional changes to it. This can be done manually prior to a Payment Export, by using this tool, or it will automatically occur during the Export. If you wish to finalize payments using this tool, highlight them first, then right-click to get this menu option. Once finalized, the Payment is marked as Finalized and will display a unique Transaction ID as well as an Check Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un-Finalize - If a Payment has incorrectly been marked as Finalized, this tool allows you to un-finalize it. Ad Manager will remove the Finalized status of the Payment, but will still show a unique Transaction ID, indicating this Payment was Finalized at one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset Exported Status - If a Payment has been Exported incorrectly, this tool allows you to mark it as un-exported, so that you may Export it again at a later date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Payments to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Payments that are due on a certain date, finalized or exported on a certain date, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the Filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Player Slots page====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Player Slots page shows you a listing of all Digital (1) Player Slots associated with this lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Players Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Players page shows you a listing of all Digital (1) Players associated with this lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Posting Schedules Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Posting Schedules Page shows you a listing of all past, present, and future postings for all Faces that are attached to a particular Lease. This is useful in determining how often the Faces have been sold, if you anticipate any difficulties renewing the Lease, or what effect cancelling the Lease will have on any planned or posted Schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Posting_Schedules.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons found on the top of the screen when you are the Posting Schedules Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- The Order button allows you to sort the activities in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of activities, in the event changes to the activities have occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Posting Schedules pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Allows you to delete a scheduled item. When you delete scheduling from this page, Ad Manager automatically updates your Subcontract charting information for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Allows you to modify or review information related to the highlighted posting schedules. If you modify any information (dates, posting type, design), Ad Manager will check for any scheduling or location related conflicts and inform you of any problems. Ad Manager automatically updates your Subcontract charting information for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Posting schedules to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see schedules (charting) related to a particular contract, subcontract, advertiser, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the Filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of assigned Faces will display this menu. From here you can alter the assignment's duration, copy to another flight, create a new task (e.g. repost), create a Take-Down task, or Update a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted schedule(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Posting_Schedules_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy To Flight - This will allow you to copy (transcribe) the highlighted Faces from this Subcontract flight to any other flight for any Subcontract. Ad Manager will check to ensure the Face is available and suitable on the new Subcontract flight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy to Multiple Flights - This will allow you to copy (transcribe) the highlighted Faces from this Subcontract flight to other flights for other Subcontracts (instead of copying them one at a time). Ad Manager will check to ensure the Face(s) is/are available and suitable on the new Subcontract flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create Take-Down Task - This feature allows you to inform Ad Manager to create a task that will generate a Posting Card/Instruction that will remove the existing copy and not replace it with new copy. You can specify the date that this Take-Down will occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New Task - This will allow you to create a new posting of the same copy on a different date for this Subcontract or create a take down record for the highlighted Face(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reservations Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reservations page shows you a listing of all reservations that are associated with the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Sites Page====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sites Page lists all Sites that have been attached to the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Sites.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Sites Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Sites on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Sites, in the event changes to the number of Sites has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to highlight multiple Sites and apply the same properties to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_duplicate_button.JPG]]- The Duplicate button allows you highlight a Site from the list and create a new Site with the same Face configuration as the highlighted one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Sites that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Site to the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Site from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, while you are in the pane, you can double click on a Site to see details about the Site. You can also right click in the pane and select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Customize Current View&amp;quot; , &amp;quot;Order&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Refresh&amp;quot; (see  above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Sites to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Sites in a certain city, state, zip code, on a certain street, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Sites will display this menu. From here you can create a new Site and add it to the Lease, duplicate a Site, Generate Line-of-Site conflicts between Sites, or Update a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Site(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Sites_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duplicate - The Duplicate menu item allows you to create a new Site with the same Face configuration as the current Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate Line-Of-Sight - the Generate Line-Of-Sight menu item allows you to create line of sight conflicts between Faces on a Site, based on their direction facing or virtual Face configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Site Conflicts - The Site Conflicts menu item allows you to view all conflicts that exist on any Face for this Site. You can specify what conditions are considered to be a Conflict prior to clicking OK. The subsequent list is all scheduling that has generated a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== User Fields Page====&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the User fields page, [[User fields page|click here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Leases</id>
		<title>Leases</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Leases"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:10:51Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Adding a New Lease */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Ad Manager maintains a database of all leases that structures are assigned to. The lease information is used in a number of areas of the software. Additional information can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Ad Manager you can track all types of information pertaining to a Lease; from the Lease number, to the terms, to which Sites/Faces are attached to it. With accurate and up-to-the minute data entry, you can have the entire history of the Lease; and, with the use of some saved Finders, you can work with your Leases in a timely organized manner.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can enter Payment Schedules and track Payments in addition to the standard leasing functionality. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding a New Lease ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are on a Site Window and want to enter Lease information, you can either enter the new lease number in the Lease Number field on the Site Details page and hit the Tab key on your keyboard, or you can go click on the arrow beside the New icon ([[File:New_add_button.JPG]]) for a list of items you can add. Select OTHER, and then select Lease. The Lease - Details Window will appear, and a new Lease can be entered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a Lease into Ad Manager from the main Ad Manager Window, click the File - New - Other menu item and select Lease. The new Lease window will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_New_Lease.JPG]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On this screen, basic information about the Lease can be entered on the Details Page. This information includes the Lease Number, any description you may wish to give for the Lease, type, the start and end dates of the Lease, and any renewal information you may wish to enter. Usually the renewal information will be dependent upon how you wish to track your Leases and when to address renewals. NOTE: Information you put on this page does not affect your Lease Payment Schedule(s). If you make changes to the dates, you will still have to edit the Payments, as necessary, to reflect these changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Lessors Page you can add Lessor information. To add a new Lessor, click the New ([[File:New_add_button.JPG]]) button to the right and you can either select an existing name or create a new one by choosing &amp;lt;New&amp;gt;. If you choose &amp;lt;New&amp;gt; the following window will appear:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_New_Lessor.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Complete the necessary data such as name, phone numbers, address, etc. NOTE: Vendor Code is a required field and must be filled in. You may also want to complete the Tax Id box if you are providing your Lessor with Government income statements. Perhaps you may wish to add a contact name if the Lessor is a Company rather than a person. To add the Contact person, click the Contacts Page, click the New button, either choose a name already existing from the list or choose &amp;lt;New&amp;gt; to add a new one and enter the detail. NOTE: You can have as many Lessors on a Lease as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
On the Contacts Page, any contact people that are related to this Lease can be added. To add a Contact person, click on the New (  ) button on the page. From here you can select a Contact from the list, or add one by clicking on &amp;lt;New...&amp;gt; at the top of the list. Once you have finished adding Contacts to the Lease, click on the Save button to save the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lessor_Contacts.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modifying a Lease ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To modify a Lease, simply click the database from the OTHER folder, then double click the desired item and make the change(s) necessary. Once you have finished, click the Save ([[File:New_save_button.JPG]]) button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
== Deleting a Lease ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To delete a Lease, there must be no sites associated with it. Select the database from the OTHER folder, then double click the desired item. Select the Delete button ([[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]) for the record. Ad Manager will ask you for confirmation to delete the lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lease Pages==&lt;br /&gt;
==== Attachments Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the Attachments page, [[Attachments|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Contacts Page====&lt;br /&gt;
The Contacts Page is used to enter information referring to all Contact people for a Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Contacts.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Contacts Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Contacts on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Contacts, in the event changes to the number of Contacts has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Contacts that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Contact to the Lease. Click on this button and either select an existing Name from the list or create a new record by choosing &amp;lt; New &amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Contact from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Contact.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Contacts to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Contacts with a certain Name, Phone number, or Address. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Details Page====&lt;br /&gt;
The Details Page is where information about the Lease agreement is displayed. Information on the terms of the Lease, and whether the Lease can be automatically extended.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Details.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the appropriate information for each field. Select the appropriate item from any of the drop down lists (in the [[File:New_dropdown_button.JPG]] boxes) or type in the information if it is not present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===== Fields =====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Description'': This is a quick description of what this Lease pertains to. This description allows the users to be able to recognize the Lease among a long list of Leases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Duration'': This is the date range for the Lease. You can enter the date or select the date from the dropdown calendar, and enter in the duration or the end date. Ad Manager will automatically calculate the third value.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Expires On'': The date when the Lease will expire. If you are extending the lease automatically, this date should always reflect the newest expiry date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Extend Automatically'': This check box should be checked if you lease agreement allows you to automatically extend the it without signing a new Lease agreement.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Extend Expiry To'': If your Lease agreement allows for the automatic extension of the Lease, the expiry date of the extension should be entered here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Number'': This is the unique Lease number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
''Renew On'': This is an arbitrary date, chosen to flag your Leasing department that its time to go out and renew the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Faces Page====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Faces Page lists all Faces that have been attached to the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Faces.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Faces Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Faces on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Faces, in the event changes to the number of Faces has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to highlight multiple Faces and apply the same properties to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Faces that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Face from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Faces to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Faces of a certain media type, facing a particular direction, of a particular size, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Faces will display this menu. From here you can move the selected Face to a different Site, chart/schedule the Face to a Subcontract, or Update a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Face(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Faces_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Faces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Move To Site - The Move To Site menu item allows you to move highlighted Faces from this Site to another Site in the inventory. A filter will appear to assist you in selecting the appropriate Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Assign To Subcontract - The Assign To Subcontract menu item allows you to highlight a Face and assign it directly to a Subcontract. A filter will appear to assist you in selecting the appropriate Subcontract.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Face Conflicts - The Face Conflicts menu item allows you to view all conflicts that exist for the highlighted Face . You can specify what conditions are considered to be a Conflict prior to clicking OK. The subsequent list is all scheduling that has generated a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Lessors Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
The Lessors Page is used to enter Lessor/Payee information for a Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Lessors.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Lessors Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Lessors on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Lessors, in the event changes to the number of Lessors has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Lessors that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Lessor to the Lease. Click on this button and either select an existing Name from the list or create a new record by choosing &amp;lt; New &amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Lessor from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Lessor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Lessors to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Lessors with a certain Name, Vendor Code, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Locations Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Locations Page lists all Digital (2) Locations that are associated with this Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Notes Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the Notes page, [[Notes page|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payment Schedules ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Payment Schedules Page provides a financial history for this Lease by showing a listing of all payment schedules that have been set up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payment_Schedules.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons found at the top of the Lease - Details screen when you are on the Payment Schedules Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the Payment Schedules in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Payment Schedules, in the event changes to the Payment Schedules have occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to select one or more Payment Schedules and change information on them. All highlighted Schedules will be changed to reflect the items selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Payment Schedules pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Payment Schedule for this Lease. The New Lease Payment Schedule - Details window will open where you can create a new Lease Payment Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Payment Schedule from this Lease. Highlight the item and click the Delete button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Opens the Lease Payment Schedule - Details window to allow you to review or change any information related to the Lease Payment.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Payment Schedules will display this menu. From here you can duplicate the Payment Schedule, change the status of a Payment Schedule as well as any line items by using the Update option.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payment_Schedules_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Payment Schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duplicate - The Duplicate menu item allows you to create a new Payment Schedule with the same Line item configuration as the current Payment Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Payment Schedules to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Payment Schedules with certain recurrence patterns, for specific Payees, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the Filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payment Summary Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Payment Summary Page allows you to identify how well you have reached your Payment requirements. From this screen you can see how much money has been Paid, Finalized, Exported, Sent, and the Current Balance Owing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payment_Summary.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Payments Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Payments Page provides a listing of all payments that have been scheduled to be payed for this Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payments.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons found at the top of the Lease - Details screen when you are on the Payments Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the Payments in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Payments, in the event changes to the Payments have occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to select one or more Payments and change information on them. All highlighted Payments will be changed to reflect the items selected. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Payments pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Create a new Lease Payment Schedule for this Lease. The New Lease Payment Schedule - Details window will open where you can create a new Lease Payment Schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Payment from this Lease. Highlight the item and click the Delete button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Opens the Payment - Details window to allow you to review or change any information related to the payment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Payments will display this menu. From here you can change the due date of a payment, the status of a payment as well as any line items by using the Update option, as well as, finalize, un-finalize, and reset the exported status of a payment or group of highlighted payments.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Payments_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Payments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Finalize - Finalizing a Payment will prevent you from making additional changes to it. This can be done manually prior to a Payment Export, by using this tool, or it will automatically occur during the Export. If you wish to finalize payments using this tool, highlight them first, then right-click to get this menu option. Once finalized, the Payment is marked as Finalized and will display a unique Transaction ID as well as an Check Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Un-Finalize - If a Payment has incorrectly been marked as Finalized, this tool allows you to un-finalize it. Ad Manager will remove the Finalized status of the Payment, but will still show a unique Transaction ID, indicating this Payment was Finalized at one time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Reset Exported Status - If a Payment has been Exported incorrectly, this tool allows you to mark it as un-exported, so that you may Export it again at a later date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Payments to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Payments that are due on a certain date, finalized or exported on a certain date, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the Filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Player Slots page====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Player Slots page shows you a listing of all Digital (1) Player Slots associated with this lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Players Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Players page shows you a listing of all Digital (1) Players associated with this lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Posting Schedules Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Posting Schedules Page shows you a listing of all past, present, and future postings for all Faces that are attached to a particular Lease. This is useful in determining how often the Faces have been sold, if you anticipate any difficulties renewing the Lease, or what effect cancelling the Lease will have on any planned or posted Schedules.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Posting_Schedules.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons found on the top of the screen when you are the Posting Schedules Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- The Order button allows you to sort the activities in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of activities, in the event changes to the activities have occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Posting Schedules pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Allows you to delete a scheduled item. When you delete scheduling from this page, Ad Manager automatically updates your Subcontract charting information for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Allows you to modify or review information related to the highlighted posting schedules. If you modify any information (dates, posting type, design), Ad Manager will check for any scheduling or location related conflicts and inform you of any problems. Ad Manager automatically updates your Subcontract charting information for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Posting schedules to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see schedules (charting) related to a particular contract, subcontract, advertiser, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the Filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of assigned Faces will display this menu. From here you can alter the assignment's duration, copy to another flight, create a new task (e.g. repost), create a Take-Down task, or Update a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted schedule(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Posting_Schedules_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy To Flight - This will allow you to copy (transcribe) the highlighted Faces from this Subcontract flight to any other flight for any Subcontract. Ad Manager will check to ensure the Face is available and suitable on the new Subcontract flight.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Copy to Multiple Flights - This will allow you to copy (transcribe) the highlighted Faces from this Subcontract flight to other flights for other Subcontracts (instead of copying them one at a time). Ad Manager will check to ensure the Face(s) is/are available and suitable on the new Subcontract flights.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Create Take-Down Task - This feature allows you to inform Ad Manager to create a task that will generate a Posting Card/Instruction that will remove the existing copy and not replace it with new copy. You can specify the date that this Take-Down will occur.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
New Task - This will allow you to create a new posting of the same copy on a different date for this Subcontract or create a take down record for the highlighted Face(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Reservations Page ====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Reservations page shows you a listing of all reservations that are associated with the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Sites Page====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Sites Page lists all Sites that have been attached to the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Sites.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Sites Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Sites on the Lease in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Sites, in the event changes to the number of Sites has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to highlight multiple Sites and apply the same properties to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_duplicate_button.JPG]]- The Duplicate button allows you highlight a Site from the list and create a new Site with the same Face configuration as the highlighted one.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Sites that are assigned to this Lease. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Site to the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Site from the Lease.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, while you are in the pane, you can double click on a Site to see details about the Site. You can also right click in the pane and select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Customize Current View&amp;quot; , &amp;quot;Order&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Refresh&amp;quot; (see  above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Lease|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Lease Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Sites to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Sites in a certain city, state, zip code, on a certain street, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Right clicking on the list of Sites will display this menu. From here you can create a new Site and add it to the Lease, duplicate a Site, Generate Line-of-Site conflicts between Sites, or Update a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Site(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Lease_Sites_right_click.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To change the information being viewed in the list, simply right click in the list, and choose Customize Current View. To change the sort order, simply right click in the list, and choose Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Duplicate - The Duplicate menu item allows you to create a new Site with the same Face configuration as the current Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Generate Line-Of-Sight - the Generate Line-Of-Sight menu item allows you to create line of sight conflicts between Faces on a Site, based on their direction facing or virtual Face configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go To - The Go To feature allows you to open a window for the appropriate item for the highlighted record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Site Conflicts - The Site Conflicts menu item allows you to view all conflicts that exist on any Face for this Site. You can specify what conditions are considered to be a Conflict prior to clicking OK. The subsequent list is all scheduling that has generated a conflict.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Update - The Update menu item allows you to to modify a property (or properties) for one or more highlighted Sites.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== User Fields Page====&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the User fields page, [[User fields page|click here]].&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:New_New_Lease.JPG</id>
		<title>File:New New Lease.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:New_New_Lease.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:09:38Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: John.devonshire uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:New New Lease.JPG&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Site</id>
		<title>Site</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Site"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:07:20Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Fields */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Attachments ==&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the Attachments page, [[Attachments page|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Categories ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Categories Page maintains a listing of all items that have been specified as positive conditions or restrictions at a Site. All Faces on this Site will inherit the conditions and restrictions specified in this window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Items in the Conditions box on the left side of the screen are considered to be positive attributes for Faces on this Site. Items in the Restrictions box on the right side of the screen are considered to be negative attributes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Categories.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Categories Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Condition or Restriction to the Site. If you are adding a new condition (positive attribute), select the  above the left box. If you are adding a restriction (negative attribute), select the  above the right box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Condition or Restriction from the Site. If you are removing a condition (positive attribute), select the  above the left box. If you are removing a restriction (negative attribute), select the  above the right box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Details ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Details Page is where information about the structure is displayed. Information on what type of structure it is (Indoor, Outdoor or Mobile), and whether the Structure is owned or leased. Site details are kept on this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Details.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, click here. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Fill in the appropriate information for each field. Select the appropriate item from any of the drop down lists (in the [[File:New_dropdown_button.JPG]] boxes) or type in the information if it is not present.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Address: This is the actual physical location of the site, which may be different than the Site At description.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
City: This is the City/Town where this Site is located.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
DMA/DMA Rank: This is where The DMA this site is located in can be stored, allowing you to identify sites that are in the same predefined &amp;quot;market area&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
CBSA: This is the CBSA that the site is located in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Latitude: This is the Latitude of the Site. It is used whenever a map using faces from this site is produced. This value can be typed in, however, Ad Manager will fill in the Latitude and Longitude automatically when the site is positioned correctly on the Map page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lease Description: This is a quick description of what this Lease pertains to. This description allows the users to be able to recognize the Lease among a long list of Leases.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lease Number: This is the lease number related to this site. You can select a lease number from the list. If the Lease is not listed, you can add it by typing the new number into the field. This will bring up the Lease Details window so you can fill in the Lease Information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legal Status:  This is where you can identify whether the legal status of the Site is either conforming or non-conforming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Legal Status (local):  This is where you can identify whether the local legal status of the Site is either conforming or non-conforming.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longitude: This is the Longitude of the Site. It is used whenever a map using faces from this site is produced. This value can be typed in however, Ad Manager will fill in the Latitude and Longitude automatically when the site is positioned correctly on the Map page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Number: This is the unique site (structure) number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Site At: This is the description of the site. To add the SITE AT description, click on the ellipsis ([[File:New_ellipsis.JPG]]) for the Address Builder window and fill in the site information accordingly.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Survey: This field is used to enter your Outdoor DemoTrack survey number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Type: Identify whether the site is an indoor site, outdoor site, or a mobile site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
ZIP/Postal Code: This field is used to enter your ZIP or Postal Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From the Tools Menu, Ad Manager will allow you to Duplicate a Site, Generate line-of-sight conflicts, and check for any Site Conflicts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Demographic Zone ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Faces ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Faces Page is used to enter Face information for a Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Faces.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Faces Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Faces on the Site in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Faces, in the event changes to the number of Faces has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_update_button.JPG]]- The Update button allows you to highlight multiple Faces and apply the same properties to them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Faces that are assigned to this Site. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new Face to the Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Face from the Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, while you are in the pane, you can double click on a Face to see details about the Face. You can also right click in the pane and select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot;, &amp;quot;Customize Current View&amp;quot; , &amp;quot;Order&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Refresh&amp;quot; (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Faces to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Faces of a certain media type, facing a particular direction, of a particular size, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Images ==&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the Images page, [[Images page|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Inactivity ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Inactivity Page maintains a history of all dates that a Site or Face has been/will be inactive. If you are inactivating a Site, every Face on the Site will be considered unavailable during this time frame.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Inactivity.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Inactivity pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- To add an Inactivity, click the New button. When selected, a screen will appear asking for the reason for the Inactivity, the date range the Site or Face will be inactive, and any other notes you wish to maintain about this inactive time frame.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- To delete an Inactivity period from the list, highlight it and click on the Delete button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- To modify an Inactivity period, highlight it and click the Properties button. Make the appropriate changes to the dates or notes, and click the Save ([[File:New_save_button.JPG]]) button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Inactivity periods to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see inactivity periods with particular start dates, end dates, durations, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Maintenance Tasks ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Map ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Site Map Page provides you with the ability to view the Site on a map and to edit the latitude and longitude information for the Site (and all Faces associated with it) directly on the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Map.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Site Map Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_zoom_in.JPG]]- By placing the Zoom In tool over the map, you can click to see the map zoomed in twice as close as before, centered where you clicked. If you hold your left mouse button down and drag the mouse, you will see a box being drawn on the map. When you release the left mouse button, Ad Manager will zoom into the specified area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_zoom_out_button.JPG]]- By placing the Zoom Out tool over the map, you can click to see the map zoomed out twice as much as before, centered where you clicked. If you hold your left mouse button down and drag the mouse, you will see a box being drawn on the map. When you release the left mouse button, Ad Manager will shrink the map to the size specified by the box.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_pan_button.JPG]]- The Pan tool allows you to move the map to see different areas not visible on the screen. To use the Pan tool, put your mouse over the map, hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse. The map will move with the Pan tool; when you release the mouse button, Ad Manager will draw the new area of the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_label_map_button.JPG]]- The Label Map Feature allows you to click on an item on the map, and have Ad Manager automatically label it for you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_set_lat_long_button.JPG]]- The Set the Latitude/Longitude of the Site tool allows you to geocode your Site quickly, easily and accurately. Using the other tools, find the correct location of this Site on your map, select this tool and click on the appropriate spot. Ad Manager will automatically update the latitude and longitude of this Site, and place a symbol there, indicating this is where the Site is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_centre_button.JPG]]- The Center the Map on this Site tool allows you to reposition the map with this Site centered.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Center - This displays the latitude and longitude co-ordinates at the center of the map currently visible.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Latitude - The latitude is how many degrees north (positive value) or south (negative value) of the equator the Site is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Longitude - The longitude is how many degrees east (negative value) or west (positive value) of the Prime Meridian the Site is.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Zoom Distance - The zoom distance is the distance (in miles) across the width of the map.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Neighbours ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Neighbors Page allows you to enter any Retail Establishment that exists close to this Site. This information can then be used when scheduling.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Neighbours.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Neighbors pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- The New button allows you to add a new Neighbor to this Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- The Delete button allows you to remove the highlighted Neighbor(s) from this Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the Notes page, [[Notes page|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Permits ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Permits Page is used to enter Permit information for a Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Permits.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tool buttons specific to the Site - Permits Page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_customize_button.JPG]]- Customize Current View allows you to select the columns to display and the order to display them in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_order_button.JPG]]- Order allows you to sort the list of Permits on the Site in the desired order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_refresh_button.JPG]]- The Refresh button will reload the list of Permits, in the event changes to the number of Permits has occurred since you visited this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The pane in the window shows a listing of all Permits that are assigned to this Site. The functions available through the buttons immediately above the pane are: &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- Add a new or select an existing Permit for this Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- Delete the highlighted Permit from the Site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- Edit the information for the highlighted Permit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, while you are in the pane, you can double click on a Permit to see details about the Permit. You can also right click in the pane and select &amp;quot;New&amp;quot; to add a Permit to the Site, &amp;quot;Customize Current View&amp;quot; , &amp;quot;Order&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Refresh&amp;quot; (see above).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Permits to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Permits applied on certain dates, expiring on certain dates, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Player Slots ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Players ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reservations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAMI Circulations ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAMI Devices ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SAMI Positions ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Structures ==&lt;br /&gt;
Type topic text here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== User Fields ==&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on the User fields page, [[User fields page|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Utility Accounts ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Utility Accounts Page allows you to track your Utility Accounts for this Site, including meter readings. You can also track and export your Utility Payments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Utility_Accounts.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The functions available through the buttons immediately above the Utility Accounts pane are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- The New button allows you to add a new Utility Account to this Site.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- The Delete button allows you to remove the highlighted Utility Account(s) from this site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- To modify a Utility Account, highlight it and click the Properties button. Make the appropriate changes, and click the Save ([[File:New_save_button.JPG]]) button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Filter check box allows you to filter the listing of Utility Accounts to show only those that meet a certain criteria. When selected, a filter screen will appear, allowing you to choose to see Utility Accounts related to a particular vendor, with certain meter readings, etc. When a filter is active, a check mark will appear in the filter box. To clear the filter and see all records, click on Filter, then the Clear button on the Filter screen, followed by the OK button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Virtual Face ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Virtual faces Page allows users to specify relationships between overlapping saleable Faces on the same physical unit. For example, a bus can be sold as driver side, passenger side and tail; however the entire bus can be sold as a bus wrap as well. By using Virtual Faces, Ad Manager would be set up to show the wrap Face unavailable during a given timeframe if any of the driver, passenger or tail Faces were scheduled, and the 3 Faces would be unavailable if the bus was scheduled to be wrapped.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_Site_Virtual_faces.JPG]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Within each pane there are 2 buttons related to activity in that pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_add_button.JPG]]- The New button allows you to add a new Virtual Face relationship between the selected Face and another.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_delete_button.JPG]]- The Delete button allows you to highlight a Face and remove its relationship to the selected Face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:New_properties_button.JPG]]- The Properties button allows you to open the highlighted Face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For additional information on the buttons that appear at the top of the window, [[Buttons#Site|click here]]. For information on the menu items that appear under the Tools menu, [[FAQ and General Info#Site Tools Menu|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The top pane on the screen allows you to select the Face you wish to work with. Once selected, Ad Manager will display any existing Face relationships in the four panes below it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Fields ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Each of the lower panes shows a listing of Faces that have a particular relationship with the selected Face.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Doesn't overlap with - This is the default setting for all Faces on a Site. If a Face is listed in this pane, there is no relationship set between it and the highlighted Face in the top of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Is enclosed by - If a Face is listed in this pane, the Face you are working with is entirely within its confines. For example, if you are working with a Bus Passenger Face, then the Bus Wrap Face would be listed in the &amp;quot;Is enclosed by&amp;quot; pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Encloses - If a Face is listed in this pane, the Face you are working with completely covers that Face. For example, if you are working with a Bus Wrap, the Driver, Tail and Passenger Faces would be listed in the &amp;quot;Encloses&amp;quot; pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Overlaps with - If a Face is listed in this pane, the Face you are working with is partially affected by that Face. For example, a structure that is sold by the square foot can have several different combinations that overlap.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a lock appears next to an item, it indicates that based on other relationships set up, this particular Face has to appear in this pane.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more information on using Virtual Faces, [[FAQ and General Info#Planning Your Virtual Faces|click here]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish to establish a relationship between Faces, select a Face to work with from the top of the screen. Find one of the Faces you wish to establish a relationship with in the &amp;quot;Doesn't overlap with&amp;quot; pane. Click and drag the Face from the &amp;quot;Doesn't overlap with&amp;quot; pane into the appropriate Virtual Face relationship pane. When you release the mouse button, Ad Manager will create that relationship.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:New_Site_Details.JPG</id>
		<title>File:New Site Details.JPG</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/File:New_Site_Details.JPG"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T18:02:57Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: John.devonshire uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:New Site Details.JPG&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Main_Page</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Main_Page"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T16:24:48Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Financial */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Release Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Ad Manager Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Billposter App Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
#[[SmartLink Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ad Manager Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[General]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Installing Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Security roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Upgrading Ad Manager|Steps to Upgrade your Version of Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[FAQ and General Info]] &lt;br /&gt;
# [[Buttons]] &lt;br /&gt;
# [[Glossary]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Minimum_Specifications Minimum Specifications]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How To ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Charting How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contract How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Design How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Filtering and Archiving How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Location How To]] &lt;br /&gt;
# [[Posting How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[XML Mapping Export Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using the Check Playlists Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using the Custom Rate Option]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using the Photo Tools in Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leases ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Leases]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment|Lease Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Site]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Face]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Players]] Digital(1)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Players Digital(2)]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Output]] Digital(2)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Location]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contracts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contract]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Subcontract (Static)]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Design]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Financial ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Financial|Financial Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Bill definition|Bill Definitions]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Invoice|Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Allocations| Bill Allocations]] (version 5.7.1 and earlier)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Bill Allocations]] (version 5.7.2 and later)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment|Lease Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Percentage_Lease_Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utility Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digital Media (1) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Slot_Structure|Setting up Slot Structures]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Slot_Structure_assignments| Slot Structure Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Players]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Rate_schedules_(digital)|Rate Schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Rate_cards_(digital)|Rate Cards]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Special_rates_(digital)|Special Rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Subcontract_(Digital)|Subcontracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using_the_Custom_Rate_Option|Using Custom Rates on a Subcontract]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digital Media (2) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Digital_media_module|Set up and Configuration]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How_To_Set_Up_Publishing_To_Content_Manager|Setting up Publishing to Content Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Digital_Media_Definitions|Digital (2) Definitions]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Landlords|Landlords]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Managing_Time_Triggers|Setting up and Managing Triggers]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Subcontracts_(Digital_2)|Subcontracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Scheduling_(Digital_2)|Scheduling]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Media_(Digital_2)|Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reservations (Digital 2)| Reservations]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Digital_Open_Space|Viewing Digital Open Space]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Incidents]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Maintenance jobs]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Structures]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Task schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Tasks]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Work orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mapping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Mapping]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Agencies]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Billposter]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lessors]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Multimedia]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Permits]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utility accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utility companies]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Sales History]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[TAB OOH Ratings Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Customizing a Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Ad Manager Report Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Administration ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Changing the owner of work space items in Ad Manager|Changing the owner of work space items]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Web Ad Manager ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Web Ad Manager Minimum Specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How to Configure a Web Ad Manager Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Setup Online PDF Reporting]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Web Ad Manager Branding|Branding]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Billposter App ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Setting_up_Web_access|Setting Up Web Roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Configuring_Billposter_App_in_Ad_Manager|Setting up Billposter Accounts in Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Setting_up_Billposter_App|How to Install and set up the Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Billposter_App_Settings|Configuring the Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using_Billposter_App|Using the Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SmartLink ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SmartLink]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dot2Dot Communications == &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Dot2DotCommunications:About|About Dot2Dot Communications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	<entry>
		<id>http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Main_Page</id>
		<title>Main Page</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Main_Page"/>
				<updated>2018-01-31T16:24:32Z</updated>
		
		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;John.devonshire: /* Financial */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== Release Notes ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Ad Manager Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Billposter App Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
#[[SmartLink Release Notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ad Manager Documentation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== General ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[General]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Installing Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Security roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Upgrading Ad Manager|Steps to Upgrade your Version of Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[FAQ and General Info]] &lt;br /&gt;
# [[Buttons]] &lt;br /&gt;
# [[Glossary]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [http://wiki.d2dcm.com/index.php/Ad_Manager_Minimum_Specifications Minimum Specifications]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== How To ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Charting How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contract How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Design How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Filtering and Archiving How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Location How To]] &lt;br /&gt;
# [[Posting How To]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[XML Mapping Export Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using the Check Playlists Tool]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using the Custom Rate Option]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using the Photo Tools in Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Leases ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Leases]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment|Lease Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Inventory ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Site]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Face]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Players]] Digital(1)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Players Digital(2)]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Output]] Digital(2)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Location]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Contracts ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Contract]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Subcontract (Static)]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Design]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Financial ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Financial|Financial Overview]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Bill definition|Bill Definitions]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Invoice|Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Allocations| Bill Allocations]] (version 5.7.1 and earlier)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Bill Allocations]] (version 5.7.2 and later)&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lease payment|Lease Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utility Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Percentage_Lease_Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digital Media (1) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Slot_Structure|Setting up Slot Structures]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Slot_Structure_assignments| Slot Structure Assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Players]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Rate_schedules_(digital)|Rate Schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Rate_cards_(digital)|Rate Cards]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Special_rates_(digital)|Special Rates]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Subcontract_(Digital)|Subcontracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using_the_Custom_Rate_Option|Using Custom Rates on a Subcontract]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Digital Media (2) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Digital_media_module|Set up and Configuration]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How_To_Set_Up_Publishing_To_Content_Manager|Setting up Publishing to Content Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Digital_Media_Definitions|Digital (2) Definitions]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Landlords|Landlords]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Managing_Time_Triggers|Setting up and Managing Triggers]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Subcontracts_(Digital_2)|Subcontracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Scheduling_(Digital_2)|Scheduling]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Media_(Digital_2)|Media]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reservations (Digital 2)| Reservations]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Digital_Open_Space|Viewing Digital Open Space]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Maintenance ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Maintenance]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Incidents]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Maintenance jobs]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Structures]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Task schedules]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Tasks]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Work orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Mapping ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Mapping]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Other ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Agencies]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Billposter]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Lessors]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Multimedia]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Permits]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utility accounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Utility companies]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Sales History]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[TAB OOH Ratings Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Reports ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Customizing a Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Ad Manager Report Library]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== System Administration ===&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Changing the owner of work space items in Ad Manager|Changing the owner of work space items]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Web Ad Manager ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Web Ad Manager Minimum Specifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[How to Configure a Web Ad Manager Server]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Setup Online PDF Reporting]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Web Ad Manager Branding|Branding]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Billposter App ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Setting_up_Web_access|Setting Up Web Roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Configuring_Billposter_App_in_Ad_Manager|Setting up Billposter Accounts in Ad Manager]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Setting_up_Billposter_App|How to Install and set up the Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Billposter_App_Settings|Configuring the Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
# [[Using_Billposter_App|Using the Billposter App]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== SmartLink ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# [[SmartLink]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dot2Dot Communications == &lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Dot2DotCommunications:About|About Dot2Dot Communications]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>John.devonshire</name></author>	</entry>

	</feed>